US20090232879A1 - Thyromimetics for the Treatment of Fatty Liver Diseases - Google Patents

Thyromimetics for the Treatment of Fatty Liver Diseases Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20090232879A1
US20090232879A1 US11/814,824 US81482406A US2009232879A1 US 20090232879 A1 US20090232879 A1 US 20090232879A1 US 81482406 A US81482406 A US 81482406A US 2009232879 A1 US2009232879 A1 US 2009232879A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
optionally substituted
alkyl
group
hydrogen
aryl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/814,824
Other languages
English (en)
Inventor
Edward E. Cable
Mark D. Erion
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Metabasis Therapeutics Inc
Original Assignee
Metabasis Therapeutics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Metabasis Therapeutics Inc filed Critical Metabasis Therapeutics Inc
Priority to US11/814,824 priority Critical patent/US20090232879A1/en
Assigned to METABASIS THERAPEUTICS, INC. reassignment METABASIS THERAPEUTICS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ERION, MARK D., CABLE, EDWARD E.
Publication of US20090232879A1 publication Critical patent/US20090232879A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/66—Phosphorus compounds
    • A61K31/683—Diesters of a phosphorus acid with two hydroxy compounds, e.g. phosphatidylinositols
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/192—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having aromatic groups, e.g. sulindac, 2-aryl-propionic acids, ethacrynic acid 
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/66—Phosphorus compounds
    • A61K31/661—Phosphorus acids or esters thereof not having P—C bonds, e.g. fosfosal, dichlorvos, malathion or mevinphos
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/66—Phosphorus compounds
    • A61K31/662—Phosphorus acids or esters thereof having P—C bonds, e.g. foscarnet, trichlorfon
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/66—Phosphorus compounds
    • A61K31/665—Phosphorus compounds having oxygen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. fosfomycin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/06—Antihyperlipidemics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/14—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the thyroid hormones, e.g. T3, T4

Definitions

  • the present invention is directed toward the use of thyromimetic compounds that are thyroid receptor ligands, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and to prodrugs of these compounds for preventing, treating, or ameliorating fatty liver diseases such as steatosis, non-alcoholic fatty liver disease, and non-alcoholic steatohepatitis.
  • Thyroid hormones are synthesized in the thyroid in response to thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), which is secreted by the pituitary gland in response to various stimulants (e.g., thyrotropin-releasing hormone (TRH) from the hypothalamus).
  • Thyroid hormones are iodinated O-aryl tyrosine analogues excreted into the circulation primarily as 3,3′,5,5′-tetraiodothyronine (T4).
  • T4 is rapidly deiodinated in local tissues by thyroxine 5′-deiodinase to 3,3′,5′-triiodothyronine (T3), which is the most potent TH.
  • T3 is metabolized to inactive metabolites via a variety of pathways, including pathways involving deiodination, glucuronidation, sulfation, deamination, and decarboxylation. Most of the circulating T4 and T3 is eliminated through the liver.
  • THs have profound physiological effects in animals and humans.
  • Hyperthyroidism is associated with increased body temperature, general nervousness, weight loss despite increased appetite, muscle weakness and fatigue, increased bone resorption and enhanced calcification, and a variety of cardiovascular changes, including increased heart rate, increased stroke volume, increased cardiac index, cardiac hypertrophy, decreased peripheral vascular resistance, and increased pulse pressure.
  • Hypothyroidism is generally associated with the opposite effects.
  • TRs thyroid hormone receptors
  • TRs belong to the nuclear receptor superfamily, which, along with its common partner, the retinoid X receptor, form heterodimers that act as ligand-inducible transcription factors.
  • TRs have a ligand binding domain and a DNA binding domain and regulate gene expression through ligand-dependent interactions with DNA response elements (thyroid response elements, TREs).
  • TR ⁇ and TR ⁇ are encoded by two distinct genes (TR ⁇ and TR ⁇ ), which produce several isoforms through alternative splicing (Williams, Mol. Cell. Biol. 20(22):8329-42 (2000); Nagaya et al., Biochem. Biophys.
  • TR ⁇ -1 The major isoforms that have so far been identified are TR ⁇ -1, TR ⁇ -2, TR ⁇ -1 and TR ⁇ -2.
  • TR ⁇ -1 is ubiquitously expressed in the rat with highest expression in skeletal muscle and brown fat.
  • TR ⁇ -1 is also ubiquitously expressed with highest expression in the liver, brain and kidney.
  • TR ⁇ -2 is expressed in the anterior pituitary gland and specific regions of the hypothalamus as well as the developing brain and inner ear. In the rat and mouse liver, TR ⁇ -1 is the predominant isoform (80%).
  • the TR isoforms found in human and rat are highly homologous with respect to their amino acid sequences which suggest that each serves a specialized function.
  • TSH is an anterior pituitary hormone that regulates thyroid hormone production. TSH formation and secretion is in turn regulated by the hypothalamic TRH. TSH controls the uptake of iodide by the thyroid, the subsequent release of iodinated thyronines from thyroglobulin (e.g., T3, T4) as well as possibly the intrapituitary conversion of circulating T4 to T3. Compounds that mimic T3 and T4 can negatively regulate both TSH and TRH secretion resulting in suppression of TSH levels and decreased levels of T3 and other iodinated thyronines. Negative regulation of TSH is postulated based on co-transfection and knockout studies (Abel et al., J. Clin. Invest. 104:291-300 (1999)) to arise through activation of the thyroid receptor TR ⁇ , possibly the isoform TR ⁇ -2, which is highly expressed in the pituitary.
  • THs are an increase in metabolic rate, oxygen consumption and heat production.
  • T3 treatment increases oxygen consumption in isolated perfused liver and isolated hepatocytes.
  • Liver mitochondria from hyperthyroid rats exhibit increased oxygen consumption (Carreras et al., Am. J. Physiol. Heart Circ. Physiol. 281(6):H2282-8 (2001)) and higher activities of enzymes in the oxidative pathways (Dummler et al., Biochem. J.
  • mitochondria from hypothyroid rats show decreased oxygen consumption.
  • Increased metabolic rates are associated with increased mitochondrial biogenesis and the associated 2- to 8-fold increase in mitochondrial mRNA levels.
  • Some of the energy produced from the increased metabolic rate is captured as ATP (adenosine 5′-triphosphate), which is stored or used to drive biosynthetic pathways (e.g., gluconeogenesis, lipogenesis, lipoprotein synthesis).
  • thermogenesis Much of the energy, however, is lost in the form of heat (thermogenesis), which is associated with an increase in mitochondrial proton leak possibly arising from TH-mediated effects on mitochondrial membrane, uncoupling proteins, enzymes involved in the inefficient sn-glycerol 3-phosphate shuttle such as mitochondrial sn-glycerol 3-phosphate dehydrogenase (mGPDH), and/or enzymes associated with proton leakage such as the adenine nucleotide transporter (ANT), Na + K + -ATPase, Ca 2+ -ATPase and ATP synthase.
  • ANT adenine nucleotide transporter
  • THs also stimulate metabolism of cholesterol to bile acids.
  • Hyperthyroidism leads to decreased plasma cholesterol levels, which is likely due to increased hepatic LDL receptor expression.
  • Hypothyroidism is a well-established cause of hypercholesterolemia and elevated serum LDL.
  • L-T3 is known to lower plasma cholesterol levels.
  • the effects of T3 are attributed to TR ⁇ since TR ⁇ -deficient mice are resistant to T3-induced reduction in cholesterol levels.
  • the effects on cholesterol levels have been postulated to result from direct effects on LDL receptor expression, enzymes involved in conversion of cholesterol to bile acids such as the rate-limiting enzyme cholesterol 7 ⁇ -hydroxylase (CYP7A) and/or possibly enzymes involved in cholesterol synthesis such as HMG CoA reductase.
  • CYP7A cholesterol 7 ⁇ -hydroxylase
  • THs are known to affect levels of other lipoproteins linked to atherosclerosis. THs stimulate apo AI and the secretion of apo AI in HDL while reducing apo B100. Accordingly, one would expect T3 and T3 mimetics to inhibit the atherosclerotic process in the cholesterol fed animal.
  • THs simultaneously increase de novo fatty acid synthesis and oxidation through effects on enzymes such as ACC, FAS, and spot-14.
  • THs increase circulating free fatty acids (FFA) levels in part by increasing production of FFAs from adipose tissue via TH-induced lipolysis.
  • FFA free fatty acids
  • T is increase mitochondrial enzyme levels involved in FFA oxidation, e.g., carnitine palmitoyltransferase 1 (CPT-1) and enzymes involved in energy storage and consumption.
  • CPT-1 carnitine palmitoyltransferase 1
  • the liver represents a major target organ of THs.
  • Microarray analysis of hepatic gene expression from livers of hypothyroid mice and mice treated with T3 showed changes in mRNA levels for 55 genes (14 positively regulated and 41 negatively regulated) (Feng et al., Mol. Endocrinol. 14(7): 947-55 (2000)).
  • Others have estimated that approximately 8% of the hepatic genes are regulated by T3. Many of these genes are important to both fatty acid and cholesterol synthesis and metabolism.
  • T3 is also known to have other effects in liver, including effects on carbohydrates through increased glycogenolysis and gluconeogenesis and decreased insulin action.
  • the heart is also a major target organ of THs.
  • THs lower systemic vascular resistance, increase blood volume and produce inotropic and chronotropic effects.
  • Overall TH results in increased cardiac output, which may suggest that T3 or T3 mimetics might be of use to treat patients with compromised cardiac function (e.g., patients undergoing coronary artery bypass grafting (CABG) or cardiac arrest) (U.S. Pat. No. 5,158,978).
  • the changes in cardiac function are a result of changes in cardiac gene expression.
  • Increased protein synthesis and increased cardiac organ weight are readily observed in T3-treated animals and represent the side effect of T3 that limits therapeutic use.
  • TR ⁇ knockout mice exhibit high TSH and T4 levels and increased heart rate suggesting that they retain cardiac sensitivity and therefore that the cardiac effects are via TR ⁇ .
  • TR ⁇ knockouts exhibit reduced heart rates.
  • THs also play a role in the development and function of brown and white adipose tissue. Both TR ⁇ and TR ⁇ are expressed in brown adipose tissue (BAT). THs induce differentiation of white adipose tissue (WAT) as well as a variety of lipogenic genes, including ACC, FAS, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase and spot-14. Overall, THs play an important role in regulating basal oxygen consumption, fat stores, lipogenesis and lipolysis (Oppenheimer et al., J. Clin. Invest. 87(1):125-32 (1991)).
  • TH has been used as an antiobesity drug for over 50 years. In the 1940s TH was used alone, whereas in the 1950s it was used in combination with diuretics and in the 1960s in combination with amphetamines. Hyperthyroidism is associated with increased food intake but is also associated with an overall increase in the basal metabolic rate (BMR). Hyperthyroidism is also associated with decreased body weight (ca. 15%) whereas hypothyroidism is associated with a 25-30% increase in body weight. Treating hypothyroidism patients with T3 leads to a decrease in body weight for most patients but not all (17% of the patients maintain weight).
  • BMR basal metabolic rate
  • TH treatment is complicated by the need for supraphysiological doses of T3 and the associated side effects, which include cardiac problems, muscle weakness and erosion of body mass. Long-term therapy has also been associated with bone loss. With these side effects, the medical community has tended to use thyroxine at low doses as an adjunct to dietary treatments. At these doses, TH has little effect on body weight or BMR.
  • T3 T3 to induce weight loss
  • higher T3 doses were required in ob/ob mice to affect oxygen consumption, which was only observed in muscle, with no changes in liver and BAT.
  • T3 analogues have been reported. Many were designed for use as cholesterol-lowering agents. Analogues that lower cholesterol and various lipoproteins (e.g., LDL cholesterol and Lp(a)) without generating adverse cardiac effects have been reported (e.g., Underwood et al., Nature 324:425-9 (1986)). In some cases the improved therapeutic profile is attributed to increased specificity for the TR- ⁇ wherein other cases it may be due to enhanced liver distribution. (Stanton et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 10(15):1661-3 (2000); Dow et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 13(3):379-82 (2003)).
  • T3 and T3 mimetics are thought to inhibit atherosclerosis by modulating the levels of certain lipoproteins known to be independent risk factors or potential risk factors of atherosclerosis, including low density lipoprotein (LDL)-cholesterol, high density lipoprotein (HDL)-cholesterol, apoAI, which is a major apoprotein constituent of high density lipoprotein (HDL) particles and lipoprotein (a) or Lp(a).
  • LDL low density lipoprotein
  • HDL high density lipoprotein
  • apoAI which is a major apoprotein constituent of high density lipoprotein (HDL) particles and lipoprotein (a) or Lp(a).
  • Lp(a) is an important risk factor, elevated in many patients with premature atherosclerosis. Lp(a) is considered highly atherogenic (de Bruin et al., J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 76:121-126 (1993)). In man, Lp(a) is a hepatic acute phase protein that promotes the binding of LDL to cell surfaces independent of LDL receptors. Accordingly, Lp(a) is thought to provide supplementary cholesterol to certain cells, e.g., cells involved in inflammation or repair. Lp(a) is an independent risk factor for premature atherosclerosis. Lp(a) is synthesized in the liver.
  • TH therapy is reported to stimulate hepatic gluconeogenesis. Enzymes specific to gluconeogenesis and important for controlling the pathway and its physiological role of producing glucose are known to be influenced by TH therapy. Phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase (PEPCK) is upregulated by TH (Park et al, J. Biol. Chem. 274:211 (1999)) whereas others have found that glucose 6-phosphatase is upregulated (Feng et al., Mol. Eildocrinol. 14:947 (2000)). TH therapy is also associated with reduced glycogen levels.
  • PEPCK Phosphoenolpyruvate carboxykinase
  • TH therapy results in improved non insulin stimulated and insulin stimulated glucose utilization and decreased insulin resistance in the muscle of ob/ob mice. (Oh et al., J Nutr. 125:125 (1995)).
  • Fatty acids consist of an alkyl chain with a terminal carboxyl group. Unsaturated fatty acids occur commonly in humans and contain up to six double bonds per chain. Most fatty acids in humans have a length of C16, C18 or C20. Fatty acids are stored primarily as esters of glycerol. Triglycerides (TGs) are triacylglycerols, i.e., where all three hydroxyls are esterified with a fatty acid. In addition to TGs, glycerol esterified with only one fatty acid (monoacylglycerol) or two fatty acids (diacylgycerols, DAGs) are found.
  • TGs Triglycerides
  • DAGs diacylgycerols
  • esterification sites on glycerol is influenced by many factors and may have important biological function.
  • Patty acids are also used in the synthesis of other molecules, e.g., esters of cholesterol which can be degraded back to the parent molecule by esterases, and various phospholipids, including lysophosphatidic acid and phosphatidic acid, which consist of phosphorylated acylated glycerols.
  • esters of cholesterol which can be degraded back to the parent molecule by esterases
  • various phospholipids including lysophosphatidic acid and phosphatidic acid, which consist of phosphorylated acylated glycerols.
  • Many of these products have biological activity suggesting that modulation of their levels may result in beneficial or detrimental effects.
  • Fatty acids are taken up by the liver from the circulation.
  • Fatty acids derived from the diet enter the circulation after ingestion and passage through the lymphatic system. Once in the circulation the fatty acids are taken up by tissues and used as a source of energy either immediately or in the future. If not used immediately, the fatty acids are usually converted to TGs. Subsequently, TGs are hydrolyzed to generate the free fatty acids and glycerol. Both are often transported from cells such as adipocytes, which store large quantities of TGs, to the liver. Lipolysis of TGs occurs through the action of lipases. For example, lipoprotein lipase hydrolyzes triacylglycerols in plasma lipoproteins.
  • HSL hormone sensitive lipase
  • insulin which inactivates the enzyme, glucagon, epinephrine, and ACTH.
  • Fatty acids in the liver are also supplied by de novo synthesis from small molecule intermediates derived from metabolic breakdown of sugars, amino acids and other fatty acids. Accordingly, excess dietary protein and carbohydrate are readily converted to fatty acids and stored as TGs.
  • a key enzyme in fatty acid synthesis is acetyl-CoA carboxylase, which controls the overall synthesis of fatty acid by controlling the synthesis of malonyl CoA from acetyl CoA.
  • Fatty acid synthase then catalyzes the addition of two carbon units to the activated carboxyl end of a growing chain. The result is the fatty acid palmitate. Palmitate is the precursor fatty acid for nearly all other fatty acids.
  • Enzymes are available that lead to unsaturated fatty acids or elongated fatty acids.
  • Fatty acids are used for energy production primarily through oxidation in mitochondria.
  • the first step entails conversion of the fatty acid to a fatty acyl CoA by acyl-CoA synthetase. Since the oxidizing enzymes are located inside the inner mitochondrial membrane and the membrane is impermeable to CoA and its derivatives, carnitine is used along with carnitine palmitoyltransferase (CPT) to transfer acyl-CoAs into the mitochondria.
  • CPT carnitine palmitoyltransferase
  • This step is rate-limiting in fatty acid oxidation. Two carbon units are removed from the carboxy terminus using four enzyme-catalyzed reactions.
  • the product is acyl-CoA which can then be used in the synthesis of fatty acids (futile cycling), ketone bodies, or enters the TCA cycle where it is converted to CO 2 and ATP. Some of the energy generated by fatty acid oxidation is stored as ATP, some used in the biosynthesis of other molecules, while some is lost in the form of heat. Agents that increase heat production can enable net energy expenditure.
  • Fat accumulation occurs when there is net energy intake relative to energy expenditure. Energy is often stored as fat, more specifically TGs. Ideally, fat is stored in the adipocyte which is its natural storage site. When in excess, however, fat is stored in other tissues, some of which can be negatively effected. Fat accumulation in the liver will depend on a multitude of factors, including fatty acid delivery from the circulation, lipogenesis (i.e., de novo lipid synthesis) in the liver, and free fatty acid oxidation.
  • lipogenesis i.e., de novo lipid synthesis
  • TH is well known to augment catecholamine stimulation of lipolysis in adipocytes.
  • Adrenergic responsiveness is influenced by the thyroid status with clear differences observed in the hypothyroid relative to hyperthyroid states (Bilezikian et al., Endocr. Rev. 4:378-388 (1983); Fisher et al., Biochemistry 6:637-647 (1967); Debons et al., J. Lipid Res. 2:86 (1961); Malbon et al., TIPS 9:33-36 (1988)).
  • plasma fatty acids are derived mostly from lipolysis of TGs in adipose tissue. Hyperthyroidism is known to enhance this process.
  • T4 is reported to cause a diminution of lipoprotein lipase activity in the mammary gland and adipose tissue (Del Prado et al., Biochem. J. 301:495-501 (1994)).
  • a decrease in lipoprotein lipase activity in the peripheral tissues was postulated to contribute to the higher TGs found in the serum of chronic hyperthyroid rats.
  • Total splanchnic uptake of fatty acids is increased in hyperthyroid patients. This is thought to arise from fatty acid blood concentration as well as augmented splanchnic blood flow. The latter would be expected as a means to compensate for the increased metabolic demand of the liver in the hyperthyroid state (Heimberg et al., Endocrine Rev. 6:590 (1985)).
  • TH is known to increase the expression of genes encoding for lipogenic enzymes and proteins closely related to lipogenesis such as hepatic S14.
  • S14 protein is known to regulate the transcription of lipogenic genes.
  • Hepatic fatty acid synthase (FAS) is another gene important for lipogenesis.
  • TREs are associated with the FAS gene and TH is known to positively regulate transcription of FAS.
  • Acetyl CoA carboxylase (ACC) is also increased with TH. Fatty acid production is increased in rodents with elevated TH levels (Roncari et al., J. Biol. Chem. 250:4134-4138 (1975)).
  • TH increases fatty acid oxidation.
  • Hyperthyroidism is associated with an increase in basal metabolic rate and correspondingly higher energy demand.
  • Hypothyroidism is associated with decreased metabolic rate.
  • the major fuel is fatty acids since the hyperthyroid mammal is thought to have limited capacity for conservation of carbohydrate as glycogen.
  • Increased oxidation of fatty acids leads to increased production of the products of fatty acid oxidation, i.e., CO 2 and ketone bodies in the hyperthyroid state.
  • the rate-limiting enzyme in fatty acid oxidation is CPT-1.
  • CPT-1 expression appears to be controlled by TH based on the discovery of a TRE in the CPT-1 promoter region (Barrero et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 279:81-88 (2000)).
  • hypothyroidism decreases CPT-1 expression and hyperthyroidism results in an increase.
  • TH is thought to increase mitochondrial enzyme activity. This could occur by increased expression in certain genes in the mitochondria or by increased mitochondria. Increases in mitochondria and/or mitochondrial enzymes associated with thermogenesis such as glycerol-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, cytochrome C oxidase, ATPases and possibly uncoupling proteins (e.g., UCP2) could result in increased fatty acid oxidation and net energy expenditure. While the liver is not the organ most commonly cited in the literature for the effect of TH on energy expenditure and thermogenesis (usually fat and muscle), it is a highly metabolic organ with a capacity for oxidizing free fatty acids. Furthermore, the liver is relatively inefficient in its ability to capture the energy produced from FFA oxidation in the form of ATP. Consequently, the liver is a relatively thermogenic organ. THs are known to increase hepatic CPT-1 and mitochondrial GPDH activities.
  • TH results in increased hepatic lipogenesis and increased fatty acid delivery to the liver from the periphery as a result of enhanced lipolysis.
  • TH increases fatty acid oxidation.
  • Fat accumulation in the liver would likely depend on the contribution of each component. It is known that thyrotoxic patients are characterized by some degree of fatty infiltration into liver and by cytoplasmic vacuolization, nuclear irregularity, and hyperchromatism in hepatocytes (Donner et al., Arch. Intern. Med., 120:25-32 (1967); Klion et al., Am. J. Med. 50:317-324 (1971)). Liver fat accumulation can be associated with liver toxicity which could arise from direct or indirect effects of TH, e.g., accumulation of fat is associated with liver toxicity.
  • Severe hyperthyroidism thyrotoxicosis
  • liver function which are thought to be related to mitochondrial dysfunction. Extensive DNA fragmentation and increased caspase-3 activity and caspase-9 activity were observed along with a decrease in the number or cristae (Upadhyay et al., Hepatology, 39:1120-1130 (2004)). In some cases liver function is reported to be compromised 45% to 90%. Ultrastructural and functional changes in the mitochondria, such as enlargement, mass increase, and formation of megamitochondria have been reported in the liver of hyperthyroid patients.
  • TH is known to induce hyperphagia which results in an increased consumption of calories.
  • the increased consumption of both fats as well as carbohydrates and proteins results in conversion to fatty acids and in increased fat stores if not compensated by an equal or greater increase in energy expenditure.
  • TH is associated with a reduction in total fat pool and weight loss. Reduction in the pool is thought to be due to an enhanced activity of the hormone sensitive lipase in adipose tissue. While the pool may decrease and fat content in the periphery may decrease, FFAs produced from enhanced lipolysis could result in the accumulation of fat in the liver. In one study, thyroxine treatment is reported to decrease liver TG 5-fold after one week but rebound 4-fold by the end of five weeks of treatment (Varas et al., Horm. Metab. Res. 31:514-518 (1999)).
  • Nonalcoholic fatty liver disease is a clinicopathological term that encompasses a disease spectrum ranging from simple TG accumulation in hepatocytes to hepatic steatosis with inflammation (nonalcoholic steatohepatitis, NASH) to fibrosis and cirrhosis.
  • NAFLD nonalcoholic steatohepatitis
  • the prevalence of NAFLD in the population is estimated to be 14-28%.
  • Hepatic insulin resistance is associated with hepatic steatosis.
  • TG metabolism e.g., DAGs and long chain AcylCoAs (LCACOA) are thought to negatively effect insulin response through effects on the insulin receptor phosphorylation.
  • Long chain CoAs and DAG increase Ser/Thr phosphorylation of insulin receptor substrates (IRS1-3) and thereby disrupt Tyr phosphorylation of these substrates by the insulin receptor.
  • IRS1-3 insulin receptor substrates
  • the resulting hepatic insulin resistance contributes to the development of compensatory hyperinsulinemia which further drives fat accumulation via SREBP1.
  • Reduction in TGs may reduce the levels of DAGs and LCACoAs and therefore improve the response to insulin. Improved response to insulin may also diminish further fat accumulation.
  • Oxidative stress results from an imbalance between pro-oxidant and antioxidant chemical species that leads to oxidative damage. Oxidation of fatty acids is an important source of reactive oxygen species (ROS). Some of the consequences of increased ROS is depleted ATP, destruction of membranes via lipid peroxidation, and release of proinflammatory cytokines. An increase in liver triglycerides may lead to increased oxidative stress in the hepatocytes, and the progression of hepatic steatosis to NASH. Human livers with NASH have increased lipid peroxidation and impaired mitochondrial function. This can result in cell death, hepatic stellate cell activation and fibrosis and inflammation.
  • ROS reactive oxygen species
  • TH is known to increase fatty acid oxidation and mitochondrial enzyme activity which could result in increased ROS and liver damage.
  • Prodrugs that are activated by P450s may also cause an increase in ROS.
  • liver triglyceride levels were reduced after treatment with thyromimetics of the present invention for 10 weeks in the DIO mouse, for 9 weeks in the ob/ob mouse, and after one week in the normal Sprague-Dawley rat.
  • Administration of thyromimetics led to improved liver histology in the ob/ob mouse, the DIO mouse and the ZDF rat and led to improved mitochondrial morphology after 10 weeks of treatment in the DIO mouse.
  • reduced liver fat led to reduced liver enzymes (e.g., ob/ob mice treated for 9 weeks).
  • the present invention relates to the use of thyromimetic compounds in methods of decreasing fat content in the liver of an animal comprising administering to said animal a therapeutically effective amount of a thyromimetic compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or prodrugs thereof or pharmaceutically acceptable salts of said prodrugs.
  • the invention further relates to methods of preventing, treating, or ameliorating fatty liver disease in an animal comprising administering to said animal a therapeutically effective amount of a thyromimetic compound, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or prodrugs thereof or pharmaceutically acceptable salts of said prodrugs.
  • the thyromimetic compounds bind to thyroid receptors in the liver. Activation of these receptors results in modulation of gene expression of genes regulated by thyroid hormones.
  • the thyromimetic compounds used in the method of the invention are useful for improving efficacy, improving the therapeutic index, e.g., decreasing non-liver related toxicities and side effects, or for improving liver selectivity, i.e., increasing distribution of an active drug to the liver relative to extrahepatic tissues and more specifically increasing distribution of an active drug to the nucleus of liver cells relative to the nucleus of extrahepatic tissue cells (including heart, kidney and pituitary).
  • Prodrugs of the compounds are useful for increasing oral bioavailability and sustained delivery of the thyromimetics.
  • the present invention relates to the use of compounds of Formula I-IX.
  • the compounds of Formula I-IX may be an active form or a prodrug thereof.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts including but not limited to acid addition salts and physiological salts, and co-crystals of said compounds of Formula I-IX.
  • prodrugs of compounds of Formula I-IX that are active forms, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, including but not limited to acid addition salts and physiological salts, and co-crystals thereof.
  • Some of the compounds of Formula I-IX have asymmetric centers.
  • included in the present invention is the use of racemic mixtures, enantiomerically enriched mixtures, diastereomeric mixtures, including diastereomeric enriched mixtures, and individual stereoisomers of the compounds of Formula I-IX and prodrugs thereof.
  • FIG. 1 shows hematoxylin and eosin (H & E) stained sections of liver from an ob/ob mouse rat treated with vehicle, T3 (100 nmole/kg/d), or Compound cis-13-1 (30 mg/kg/d).
  • FIG. 2A shows an H & E stained section of liver from a ZDF rat treated with vehicle.
  • FIG. 2B shows an H & E stained section of liver from a ZDF rat treated with Compound cis-13-1 (0.2 mg/kg/d).
  • FIG. 2C shows an H & E stained section of liver from a ZDF rat treated with Compound cis-13-1 (1 mg/kg/d).
  • FIG. 2D shows an H & E stained section of liver from a ZDF rat treated with Compound cis-13-1 (2.5 mg/kg/d).
  • FIG. 3A shows an H & E stained section of liver from a DIO mouse treated with vehicle.
  • FIG. 3B shows an H & E stained section of liver from a DIO mouse treated with Compound cis-13-1 (30 mg/kg/d).
  • T groups that have more than one atom are read from left to right wherein the left atom of the T group is connected to the phenyl group bearing the R 1 and R 2 groups, and the right atom of the T group is linked to the carbon, phosphorus, or other atom in X or E.
  • T is —O—CH 2 — or —N(H)C(O)— it means -phenyl-O—CH 2 —X and -phenyl-N(H)C(O)—X.
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched or cyclic chain hydrocarbon radical with only single carbon-carbon bonds. Representative examples include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, cyclobutyl, pentyl, cyclopentyl, hexyl, and cyclohexyl, all of which may be optionally substituted. Alkyl groups are C 1 -C 20 .
  • aryl refers to aromatic groups which have 5-14 ring atoms and at least one ring having a conjugated pi electron system and includes carbocyclic aryl, heterocyclic aryl and biaryl groups, all of which may be optionally substituted.
  • Carbocyclic aryl groups are groups which have 6-14 ring atoms wherein the ring atoms on the aromatic ring are carbon atoms.
  • Carbocyclic aryl groups include monocyclic carbocyclic aryl groups and polycyclic or fused compounds such as optionally substituted naphthyl groups.
  • Heterocyclic aryl or heteroaryl groups are groups which have 5-14 ring atoms wherein 1 to 4 heteroatoms are ring atoms in the aromatic ring and the remainder of the ring atoms being carbon atoms. Suitable heteroatoms include oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, and selenium. Suitable heteroaryl groups include furanyl, thienyl, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, N-lower alkyl pyrrolyl, pyridyl-N-oxide, pyrimidyl, pyrazinyl, imidazolyl, and the like, all optionally substituted.
  • biasing represents aryl groups which have 5-14 atoms containing more than one aromatic ring including both fused ring systems and aryl groups substituted with other aryl groups. Such groups may be optionally substituted. Suitable biaryl groups include naphthyl and biphenyl.
  • optionally substituted or “substituted” includes groups substituted by one, two, three, four, five, or six substituents, independently selected from lower alkyl, lower aryl, lower aralkyl, lower cyclic alkyl, lower heterocycloalkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower aryloxy, perhaloalkoxy, aralkoxy, lower heteroaryl, lower heteroaryloxy, lower heteroarylalkyl, lower heteroaralkoxy, azido, amino, halo, lower alkylthio, oxo, lower acylalkyl, lower carboxy esters, carboxyl, -carboxamido, nitro, lower acyloxy, lower aminoalkyl, lower alkylaminoaryl, lower alkylaryl, lower alkylaminoalkyl, lower alkoxyaryl, lower arylamino, lower aralkylamino, sulfonyl, lower-carboxamidoalkyla
  • Substituted aryl and “substituted heteroaryl” refers to aryl and heteroaryl groups substituted with 1-3 substituents. These substituents are selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower perhaloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, and amino.
  • -aralkyl refers to an alkylene group substituted with an aryl group. Suitable aralkyl groups include benzyl, picolyl, and the like, and may be optionally substituted. “Heteroarylalkyl” refers to an alkylene group substituted with a heteroaryl group.
  • alkylaryl- refers to an aryl group substituted with an alkyl group. “Lower alkylaryl-” refers to such groups where alkyl is lower alkyl.
  • lower referred to herein in connection with organic radicals or compounds respectively refers to 6 carbon atoms or less. Such groups may be straight chain, branched, or cyclic.
  • cyclic alkyl or “cycloalkyl” refers to alkyl groups that are cyclic of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and in one aspect are 3 to 6 carbon atoms Suitable cyclic groups include norbornyl and cyclopropyl. Such groups may be substituted.
  • heterocyclic refers to cyclic groups of 3 to 10 atoms, and in one aspect are 3 to 6 atoms, containing at least one heteroatom, in a further aspect are 1 to 3 heteroatoms. Suitable heteroatoms include oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen. Heterocyclic groups may be attached through a nitrogen or through a carbon atom in the ring.
  • the heterocyclic alkyl groups include unsaturated cyclic, fused cyclic and spirocyclic groups. Suitable heterocyclic groups include pyrrolidinyl, morpholino, morpholinoethyl, and pyridyl.
  • arylamino (a), and “aralkylamino” (b), respectively, refer to the group —NRR′ wherein respectively, (a) R is aryl and R′ is hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or aryl, and (b) R′ is aralkyl and R′ is hydrogen, aralkyl, aryl, alkyl or heterocycloalkyl.
  • acyl refers to —C(O)R where R is alkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or aryl.
  • carboxy esters refers to —C(O)OR where R is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cyclic alkyl, or heterocycloalkyl, all optionally substituted.
  • oxo refers to ⁇ O in an alkyl or heterocycloalkyl group.
  • amino refers to —NRR′ where R and R′ are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl and heterocycloalkyl, all except H are optionally substituted; and R and R′ can form a cyclic ring system.
  • -sulphonylamido or “-sulfonylamido” refers to —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR 2 where each R is independently hydrogen or alkyl.
  • halogen refers to —F, —Cl, —Br and —I.
  • alkylaminoalkylcarboxy refers to the group alkyl-NR-alk-C(O)—O— where “alk” is an alkylene group, and R is a H or lower alkyl.
  • sulphonyl or “sulfonyl” refers to —SO 2 R, where R is H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heterocycloalkyl.
  • sulphonate or “sulfonate” refers to —SO 2 OR, where R is —H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heterocycloalkyl.
  • alkenyl refers to unsaturated groups which have 2 to 12 atoms and contain at least one carbon-carbon double bond and includes straight-chain, branched-chain and cyclic groups. Alkenyl groups may be optionally substituted. Suitable alkenyl groups include allyl. “1-Alkenyl” refers to alkenyl groups where the double bond is between the first and second carbon atom. If the 1-alkenyl group is attached to another group, e.g., it is a W substituent attached to the cyclic phosphonate, it is attached at the first carbon.
  • alkynyl refers to unsaturated groups which have 2 to 12 atoms and contain at least one carbon-carbon triple bond and includes straight-chain, branched-chain and cyclic groups. Alkynyl groups may be optionally substituted. Suitable alkynyl groups include ethynyl. “1-Alkynyl” refers to alkynyl groups where the triple bond is between the first and second carbon atom. If the 1-alkynyl group is attached to another group, e.g., it is a W substituent attached to the cyclic phosphonate, it is attached at the first carbon.
  • alkylene refers to a divalent straight chain, branched chain or cyclic saturated aliphatic group. In one aspect the alkylene group contains up to and including 10 atoms. In another aspect the alkylene group contains up to and including 6 atoms. In a further aspect the alkylene group contains up to and including 4 atoms. The alkylene group can be either straight, branched or cyclic.
  • acyloxy refers to the ester group —O—C(O)R, where R is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heterocycloalkyl.
  • aminoalkyl- refers to the group NR 2 -alk- wherein “alk” is an alkylene group and R is selected from —H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, and heterocycloalkyl.
  • alkylaminoalkyl- refers to the group alkyl-NR-alk- wherein each “alk” is an independently selected alkylene, and R is H or lower alkyl. “Lower alkylaminoalkyl-” refers to groups where the alkyl and the alkylene group is lower alkyl and alkylene, respectively.
  • arylaminoalkyl- refers to the group aryl-NR-alk- wherein “alk” is an alkylene group and R is —H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heterocycloalkyl.
  • alkylene group is lower alkylene.
  • alkylaminoaryl- refers to the group alkyl-NR-aryl- wherein “aryl” is a divalent group and R is —H, alkyl, aralkyl, or heterocycloalkyl. In “lower alkylaminoaryl-,” the alkyl group is lower alkyl.
  • alkoxyaryl- refers to an aryl group substituted with an alkyloxy group.
  • alkyl group is lower alkyl.
  • aryloxyalkyl- refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryloxy group.
  • aralkyloxyalkyl- refers to the group aryl-alk-O-alk- wherein “alk” is an alkylene group. “Lower aralkyloxyalkyl-” refers to such groups where the alkylene groups are lower alkylene.
  • alkoxy- or “alkyloxy-” refers to the group alkyl-O—.
  • alkoxyalkyl- or “alkyloxyalkyl-” refer to the group alkyl-O-alk- wherein “alk” is an alkylene group. In “lower alkoxyalkyl-,” each alkyl and alkylene is lower alkyl and alkylene, respectively.
  • alkylthio- refers to the group alkyl-S—.
  • alkylthioalkyl- refers to the group alkyl-5-alk- wherein “alk” is an alkylene group.
  • alk is an alkylene group.
  • lower alkylthioalkyl- each alkyl and alkylene is lower alkyl and alkylene, respectively.
  • alkoxycarbonyloxy- refers to alkyl-O—C(O)—O—.
  • aryloxycarbonyloxy- refers to aryl-O—C(O)—O—.
  • alkylthiocarbonyloxy- refers to alkyl-S—C(O)—O—.
  • amido refers to the NR 2 group next to an acyl or sulfonyl group as in NR 2 —C(O)—, RC(O)—NR 1 —, NR 2 —S( ⁇ O) 2 — and RS( ⁇ O) 2 —NR 1 —, where R and R 1 include —H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, and heterocycloalkyl.
  • Carboxamido refer to NR 2 —C(O)— and RC(O)—NR 1 —, where R and R 1 include —H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, and heterocycloalkyl.
  • the tern does not include urea, —NR—C(O)—NR—.
  • sulphonamido or “sulfonamido” refer to NR 2 —S( ⁇ O) 2 — and RS( ⁇ O) 2 —NR 1 —, where R and R 1 include —H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, and heterocycloalkyl. The term does not include sulfonylurea, —NR—S( ⁇ O) 2 —NR—.
  • carboxamidoalkylaryl and “carboxamidoaryl” refers to an aryl-alk-NR 1 —C(O), and ar-NR 1 —C(O)-alk-, respectively where “ar” is aryl, “alk” is alkylene, R 1 and R include H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, and heterocycloalkyl.
  • sulfonamidoalkylaryl and “sulfonamidoaryl” refers to an aryl-alk-NR 1 —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, and ar-NR 1 —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, respectively where “ar” is aryl, “alk” is alkylene, R 1 and R include —H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, and heterocycloalkyl.
  • hydroxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with one —OH.
  • haloalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with halo.
  • cyano refers to —C ⁇ N.
  • nitro refers to —NO 2 .
  • acylalkyl refers to an alkyl-C(O)-alk-, where “alk” is alkylene.
  • aminocarboxamidoalkyl- refers to the group NR 2 —C(O)—N(R)-alk- wherein R is an alkyl group or H and “alk” is an alkylene group. “Lower aminocarboxamidoalkyl-” refers to such groups wherein “alk” is lower alkylene.
  • heteroarylalkyl refers to an alkylene group substituted with a heteroaryl group.
  • perhalo refers to groups wherein every C—H bond has been replaced with a C-halo bond on an aliphatic or aryl group.
  • Suitable perhaloalkyl groups include —CF 3 and —CFCl 2 .
  • co-crystal as used herein means a crystalline material comprised of two or more unique solids at room temperature, each containing distinctive physical characteristics, such as structure, melting point and heats of fusion.
  • the co-crystals of the present invention comprise a co-crystal former H-bonded to a compound of the present invention.
  • the co-crystal former may be H-bonded directly to the compound of the present invention or may be H-bonded to an additional molecule which is bound to the compound of the present invention.
  • the additional molecule may be H-bonded to the compound of the present invention or bound ionically to the compound of the present invention.
  • the additional molecule could also be a second API.
  • Solvates of compounds of the present invention that do not further comprise a co-crystal former are not “co-crystals” according to the present invention.
  • the co-crystals may however, include one or more solvate molecules in the crystalline lattice. That is, solvates of co-crystals, or a co-crystal further comprising a solvent or compound that is a liquid at room temperature, is included in the present invention as a co-crystal.
  • the co-crystals may also be a co-crystal between a co-crystal former and a salt of a compound of the present invention, but the compound of the present invention and the co-crystal former are constructed or bonded together through hydrogen bonds.
  • Other modes of molecular recognition may also be present including, pi-stacking, guest-host complexation and van der Waals interactions.
  • hydrogen-bonding is the dominant interaction in the formation of the co-crystal, (and a required interaction according to the present invention) whereby a non-covalent bond is formed between a hydrogen bond donor of one of the moieties and a hydrogen bond acceptor of the other.
  • Crystalline material comprised of solid compound of the present invention and one or more liquid solvents (at room temperature) are included in the present invention as “solvates.”
  • a “hydrate” is where the solvent is water.
  • Other forms of the present invention include, but are not limited to, anhydrous forms and de-solvated solvates.
  • the ratio of the compound of the present invention to co-crystal former or solvent may be specified as stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric. 1:1, 1.5:1, 1:1.5, 2:1, 1:2, and 1:3 ratios of API:co-crystal former/solvent are examples of stoichiometric ratios.
  • binding means the specific association of the compound of interest to the thyroid hormone receptor.
  • One method of measuring binding in this invention is the ability of the compound to inhibit the association of 125 I-T3 with a mixture of thyroid hormone receptors using nuclear extracts or purified or partially purified thyroid hormone receptor (for example, alpha or beta) in a heterologous assay.
  • energy expenditure means basal or resting metabolic rate as defined by Schoeller et al., J Appl Physiol. 53(4):955-9 (1982). Increases in the resting metabolic rate can also be measured using increases in O 2 consumption and/or CO 2 efflux and/or increases in organ or body temperature.
  • terapéuticaally effective amount means an amount of a compound or a combination of compounds that ameliorates, attenuates or eliminates one or more of the symptoms of a particular disease or condition or prevents, modifies, or delays the onset of one or more of the symptoms of a particular disease or condition.
  • patient means an animal.
  • animal includes birds and mammals.
  • a mammal includes a dog, cat, cow, horse, goat, sheep, pig or human.
  • the animal is a human.
  • the animal is a male.
  • the animal is a female.
  • prodrug refers to any compound that when administered to a biological system generates a biologically active compound as a result of spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme catalyzed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s), or a combination of each.
  • Standard prodrugs are formed using groups attached to functionality, e.g., HO—, HS—, HOOC—, R 2 N—, associated with the drug, that cleave in vivo.
  • Standard prodrugs include but are not limited to carboxylate esters where the group is alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, acyloxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl as well as esters of hydroxyl, thiol and amines where the group attached is an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, phosphate or sulfate.
  • the groups illustrated are exemplary, not exhaustive, and one skilled in the art could prepare other known varieties of prodrugs. Such prodrugs of the compounds of the present invention fall within this scope. Prodrugs must undergo some form of a chemical transformation to produce the compound that is biologically active or is a precursor of the biologically active compound.
  • the prodrug is biologically active, usually less than the drug itself, and serves to improve drug efficacy or safety through improved oral bioavailability, and/or pharmacodynamic half-life, etc.
  • Prodrug forms of compounds may be utilized, for example, to improve bioavailability, improve subject acceptability such as by masking or reducing unpleasant characteristics such as bitter taste or gastrointestinal irritability, alter solubility such as for intravenous use, provide for prolonged or sustained release or delivery, improve ease of formulation, or provide site-specific delivery of the compound.
  • Prodrugs are described in The Organic Chemistry of Drug Design and Drug Action, by Richard B. Silverman, Academic Press, San Diego, 1992. Chapter 8: “Prodrugs and Drug delivery Systems” pp.
  • Prodrugs of carboxylic acid-containing thyromimetics are convertible by solvolysis or under physiological conditions to the free carboxylic acids.
  • Examples of prodrugs include carboxylic acid esters, and are preferably lower alkyl esters, cycloalkyl esters, lower alkenyl esters, benzyl esters, aryl esters, mono- or di-substituted lower alkyl esters, e.g., the ⁇ -(amino, mono- or di-lower alkylamino, carboxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl)-lower alkyl esters, and the ⁇ -(lower alkanoyloxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl or di-lower alkylaminocarbonyl)-lower alkyl esters, such as the pivaloyloxy-methyl ester.
  • Prodrugs of phosphorus-containing thyromimetics breakdown chemically or enzymatically to a phosphonic acid or phosphinic acid group or a monoester thereof in vivo.
  • the term includes, but is not limited to, the following groups and combinations of these groups:
  • acyloxyalkyl esters are possible in which a cyclic alkyl ring is formed. These esters have been shown to generate phosphorus-containing nucleotides inside cells through a postulated sequence of reactions beginning with deesterification and followed by a series of elimination reactions (e.g., Freed et al., Biochem. Pharm, 38:3193-3198 (1989)).
  • alkyloxycarbonyloxymethyl esters as shown in formula A, where R is alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylamino, and arylamino; R′, and R′′ are independently —H, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, and heterocycloalkyl have been studied in the area of ⁇ -lactam antibiotics (Nishimura et al., J. Antibiotics 40(1):81-90 (1987); for a review see Ferres, H., Drugs of Today, 19:499 (1983)). More recently Cathy, M. S. et al.
  • R, R′, and R′′ are independently H, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, and alicyclic (see WO 90/08155; WO 90/10636).
  • acyloxyalkyl esters are possible in which a cyclic alkyl ring is formed such as shown in formula B. These esters have been shown to generate phosphorus-containing nucleotides inside cells through a postulated sequence of reactions beginning with deesterification and followed by a series of elimination reactions (e.g., Freed et al., Biochem. Pharm. 38:3193-3198 (1989)).
  • R is —H, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylamino, arylamino, or cycloalkyl.
  • Aryl esters have also been used as phosphonate prodrugs (e.g., DeLambert et al., J. Med. Chem. 37(7):498-511 (1994); Serafinowska et al., J. Med. Chem. 38(8):1372-9 (1995). Phenyl as well as mono and poly-substituted phenyl proesters have generated the parent phosphonic acid in studies conducted in animals and in man (Formula C). Another approach has been described where Y is a carboxylic ester ortho to the phosphate (Khamnei et al., J. Med. Chem. 39:4109-15 (1996)).
  • Y is —H, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, acyloxy, halogen, amino, alkoxycarbonyl, hydroxy, cyano, and heterocycloalkyl.
  • Benzyl esters have also been reported to generate the parent phosphonic acid. In some cases, using substituents at the para-position can accelerate the hydrolysis.
  • Benzyl analogs with 4-acyloxy or 4-alkyloxy group [Formula D, X ⁇ —H, OR or O(CO)R or O(CO)OR] can generate the 4-hydroxy compound more readily through the action of enzymes, e.g., oxidases, esterases, etc. Examples of this class of prodrugs are described in Mitchell et al., J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. I 2345 (1992); WO 91/19721.
  • X and Y are independently —H, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, alkoxy, acyloxy, hydroxy, cyano, nitro, perhaloalkyl, halo, or alkyloxycarbonyl; and R′ and R′′ are independently —H, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, halogen, and cyclic alkyl.
  • Thio-containing phosphonate proesters may also be useful in the delivery of drugs to hepatocytes. These proesters contain a protected thioethyl moiety as shown in formula E. One or more of the oxygens of the phosphonate can be esterified. Since the mechanism that results in de-esterification requires the generation of a free thiolate, a variety of thiol protecting groups are possible. For example, the disulfide is reduced by a reductase-mediated process (Puech et al., Antiviral Res. 22:155-174 (1993)). Thioesters will also generate free thiolates after esterase-mediated hydrolysis Benzaria, et al., J. Med. Chem. 39(25):4958-65 (1996)). Cyclic analogs are also possible and were shown to liberate phosphonate in isolated rat hepatocytes. The cyclic disulfide shown below has not been previously described and is novel.
  • Z is alkylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylthio.
  • prodrugs include proester classes exemplified by Biller and Magnin (U.S. Pat. No. 5,157,027); Serafinowska et al., J. Med. Chem. 38(8):1372-9 (1995); Starrett et al., J. Med. Chem. 37:1857 (1994); Martin et al. J. Pharm. Sci. 76:180 (1987); Alexander et al., Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun. 59:1853 (1994); and EP 0 632 048 A1.
  • Some of the structural classes described are optionally substituted, including fused lactones attached at the omega position (formulae E-1 and E-2) and optionally substituted 2-oxo-1,3-dioxolenes attached through a methylene to the phosphorus oxygen (formula E-3) such as:
  • R is —H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl
  • Y is —H, alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, cyano, alkoxy, acyloxy, halogen, amino, heterocycloalkyl, and alkoxycarbonyl.
  • the prodrugs of Formula E-3 are an example of “optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl where the cyclic moiety contains a carbonate or thiocarbonate.”
  • Propyl phosphonate proesters can also be used to deliver-drugs into hepatocytes. These proesters may contain a hydroxyl and hydroxyl group derivatives at the 3-position of the propyl group as shown in formula F.
  • the R and X groups can form a cyclic ring system as shown in formula F.
  • One or more of the oxygens of the phosphonate can be esterified.
  • R is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl
  • X is hydrogen, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkyloxycarbonyloxy
  • Y is alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, alkoxy, alkylamino, alkylthio, halogen, hydrogen, hydroxy, acyloxy, amino.
  • Phosphoramidate derivatives have been explored as phosphate prodrugs (e.g., McGuigan et al., J. Med. Chem. 42:393 (1999) and references cited therein) as shown in Formula G and H.
  • Cyclic phosphoramidates have also been studied as phosphonate prodrugs because of their speculated higher stability compared to non-cyclic phosphoramidates (e.g., Starrett et al., J. Med. Chem. 37:1857 (1994)).
  • prodrugs are possible based on literature reports such as substituted ethyls, for example, bis(trichloroethyl)esters as disclosed by McGuigan, et al., Bioorg Med. Chem. Lett. 3:1207-1210 (1993), and the phenyl and benzyl combined nucleotide esters reported by Meier, C. et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 7:99-104 (1997).
  • substituted ethyls for example, bis(trichloroethyl)esters as disclosed by McGuigan, et al., Bioorg Med. Chem. Lett. 3:1207-1210 (1993), and the phenyl and benzyl combined nucleotide esters reported by Meier, C. et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 7:99-104 (1997).
  • cyclic phosphonate ester of 1,3-propane diol refers to the following:
  • the structure shown above (left) has an additional 3 carbon atoms that forms a five member cyclic group. Such cyclic groups must possess the listed substitution to be oxidized.
  • V and Z are connected via an additional 3-5 atoms to form a cyclic group, optionally containing one heteroatom, that is fused to an aryl group attached at the beta and gamma position to the Y attached to the phosphorus” includes the following:
  • V and W are connected via an additional 3 carbon atoms to form an optionally substituted cyclic group containing 6 carbon atoms and substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyloxy, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylthiocarbonyloxy, and aryloxycarbonyloxy, attached to one of said additional carbon atoms that is three atoms from a Y attached to the phosphorus” includes the following:
  • the structure above has an acyloxy substituent that is three carbon atoms from a Y, and an optional substituent, —CH 3 , on the new 6-membered ring.
  • W and W′ are connected via an additional 2-5 atoms to form a cyclic group, optionally containing 0-2 heteroatoms, and V must be aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl” includes the following:
  • V aryl
  • a spiro-fused cyclopropyl group for W and W′ spiro-fused cyclopropyl group for W and W′.
  • cyclic phosphon(amid)ate refers to
  • Y is independently —O— or —NR V —.
  • the carbon attached to V must have a C—H bond.
  • the carbon attached to Z must also have a C—H bond.
  • the naming of the compounds is done by having the ring bearing the groups R 5 and R 3 be a substituent on the ring bearing the R 1 and R 2 groups.
  • the naming of the prodrugs is done by having the diaryl system with its linker T (Formula I, II, III, V, VI, and VIII) or D (Formula IV) be a substituent on the phosphorus atom contained in X.
  • T Linker
  • D Formula IV
  • [3-R 1 -5-R 2 -4-(4′-R 5 -3′-R 3 -benzyl)phenoxy]methylphosphonic acid represents the formula:
  • N-[3-R 1 -5-R 2 -4-(4′-R 5 -3′-R 3 -phenoxy)phenyl]carbamoylphosphonic acid represents the formula:
  • cis stereochemistry refers to the spatial relationship of the V group and the carbon attached to the phosphorus atom on the six-membered ring.
  • the formula below shows a cis stereochemistry.
  • trans stereochemistry refers to the spatial relationship of the V group and the carbon, attached to the phosphorus atom, on the six-membered ring.
  • the formula below shows a trans-stereochemistry.
  • S-configuration refers to the absolute configuration S of carbon C′.
  • the formula below shows the S-stereochemistry.
  • R-configuration refers to the absolute configuration R of carbon C′.
  • R-isomer refers to the absolute configuration R of carbon C′.
  • the formula below shows the R-stereochemistry.
  • percent enantiomeric excess refers to optical purity. It is obtained by using the following formula:
  • enantioenriched or “enantiomerically enriched” refers to a sample of a chiral compound that consists of more of one enantiomer than the other. The extent to which a sample is enantiomerically enriched is quantitated by the enantiomeric ratio or the enantiomeric excess.
  • liver refers to liver organ.
  • enhancing refers to increasing or improving a specific property.
  • liver specificity refers to the ratio:
  • the ratio can be determined by measuring tissue levels at a specific time or may represent an AUC based on values measured at three or more time points.
  • phosphorus-containing compounds refers to compounds that contain PO 3 H 2 , PO 3 2 ⁇ , PO 2 HR, PO 2 R ⁇ , and monoesters and phosphamic acid derivatives thereof.
  • surrogates of carboxylic acid refers to groups that possess near equal molecular shapes and volumes as carboxylic acid and which exhibit similar physical and biological properties.
  • examples of surrogates of carboxylic acid include, but are not limited to, tetrazole, 6-azauracil, acylsulphonamides, sulfonic acids, thiazolidinedione, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, and carboxylic acid amides.
  • phosphorus-containing thyromimetics e.g., phosphonic acid-, phosphonic acid monoester-, and phosphinic acid-containing compounds
  • phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, and phosphinic acid are not considered to be surrogates of carboxylic acid in these compounds.
  • inhibitor of fructose-1,6-biphosphatase refers to compounds that inhibit FBPase enzyme activity and thereby block the conversion of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate, the substrate of the enzyme, to fructose 6-phosphate. These compounds have an IC 50 of equal to or less than 50 ⁇ M on human liver FBPase measured according to the procedure found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,489,476.
  • the term “increased or enhanced liver specificity” refers to an increase in the liver specificity ratio in animals treated with a compound of the present invention and a control compound.
  • the test compound is a phosphorus-containing compound and in another embodiment the test compound is a prodrug thereof.
  • the control compound is a phosphorus-containing compound of the present invention. In another embodiment the control compound is the corresponding carboxylic acid derivative of the phosphorus-containing test compound.
  • the term “enhanced oral bioavailability” refers to an increase of at least 50% of the absorption of the dose of the parent drug, unless otherwise specified. In an additional aspect the increase in oral bioavailability of the prodrug (compared to the parent drug) is at least 100%, that is a doubling of the absorption. Measurement of oral bioavailability usually refers to measurements of the prodrug, drug, or drug metabolite in blood, plasma, tissues, or urine following oral administration compared to measurements following systemic administration of the compound administered orally.
  • treating includes a slowing of the progress or development of a disease after onset or actually reversing some or all of the disease effects. Treatment also includes palliative treatment.
  • preventing includes a slowing of the progress or development of a disease before onset or precluding onset of a disease.
  • thyroid hormone receptors refers to intracellular proteins located in cell nuclei that, following the binding of thyroid hormone, stimulate transcription of specific genes by binding to DNA sequences called thyroid hormone response elements (TREs). In this manner TR regulates the expression of a wide variety of genes involved in metabolic processes (e.g., cholesterol homeostasis and fatty acid oxidation) and growth and development in many tissues, including liver, muscle and heart.
  • TR alpha on chromosome 17
  • TR beta on chromosome 3
  • Each of these isoforms also has two main isoforms: TR alpha-1 and TR alpha-2; and TR beta-1 and TR beta-2, respectively.
  • TRs are high affinity receptors for thyroid hormones, especially triiodothyronine.
  • ACC refers to acetyl CoA carboxylase.
  • FAS fatty acid synthase
  • spot-14 refers to a 17 kilodalton protein expressed in lipogenic tissues and is postulated to play a role in thyroid hormone stimulation of lipogenesis. (Campbell, M C et al., Endocrinology 10:1210 (2003).
  • CPT-1 refers to carnitine palmitoyltransferase-1.
  • CYP7A refers to cholesterol 7-alpha hydroxylase, which is a membrane-bound cytochrome P450 enzyme that catalyzes the 7-alpha-hydroxylation of cholesterol in the presence of molecular oxygen and NADPH-ferrihemoprotein reductase.
  • CYP7A encoded by CYP7, converts cholesterol to 7-alpha-hydroxycholesterol which is the first and rate-limiting step in the synthesis of bile acids.
  • apoAI refers to Apolipoprotein AI found in HDL and chylomicrons. It is an activator of LCAT and a ligand for the HDL receptor.
  • mGPDH refers to mitochondrial glycerol-3-phosphate dehydrogenase.
  • hypocholesterolemia refers to presence of an abnormally large amount of cholesterol in the cells and plasma of the circulating blood.
  • hypolipidemia or “lipemia” refers to the presence of an abnormally large amount of lipids in the circulating blood.
  • Atherosclerosis refers to a condition characterized by irregularly distributed lipid deposits in the intima of large and medium-sized arteries wherein such deposits provoke fibrosis and calcification. Atherosclerosis raises the risk of angina, stroke, heart attack, or other cardiac or cardiovascular conditions.
  • obese refers to the condition of being obese. Being obese is defined as a body mass index (BMMD of 30.0 or greater; and extreme obesity is defined at a BMI of 40 or greater. “Overweight” is defined as a body mass index of 25.0 to 29.9 (This is generally about 10 percent over an ideal body weight)
  • coronary heart disease refers to an imbalance between myocardial functional requirements and the capacity of the coronary vessels to supply sufficient blood flow. It is a form of myocardial ischemia (insufficient blood supply to the heart muscle) caused by a decreased capacity of the coronary vessels.
  • diabetes refers to a heterogeneous group of disorders that share glucose intolerance in common. It refers to disorders in which carbohydrate utilization is reduced and that of lipid and protein enhanced; and may be characterized by hyperglycemia, glycosuria, ketoacidosis, neuropathy, or nephropathy.
  • non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus refers to a heterogeneous disorder characterized by impaired insulin secretion by the pancreas and insulin resistance in tissues such as the liver, muscle and adipose tissue.
  • the manifestations of the disease include one or more of the following: impaired glucose tolerance, fasting hyperglycemia, glycosuria, increased hepatic glucose output, reduced hepatic glucose uptake and glycogen storage, reduced whole body glucose uptake and utilization, dyslipidemia, fatty liver, ketoacidosis, microvascular diseases such as retinopathy, nephropathy and neuropathy, and macrovascular diseases such as coronary heart disease.
  • IGT impaired glucose tolerance
  • fatty liver and “liver steatosis” are interchangeable and refer to a disease or disorder characterized by significant lipid deposition in the liver hepatocytes (parenchyma cells). Simple fatty liver or liver steatosis is not associated with any other liver abnormalities such as scarring or inflammation. Fatty liver or liver steatosis is a common occurrence in patients who are very overweight or have diabetes mellitus.
  • NonAlcoholic SteatoHepatitis refers to a disease or disorder characterized by inflammation of the liver in combination with fatty liver. NASH is a possible diagnosis when other causes of liver inflammation such as hepatitis B and C viruses, autoimmune disorders, alcohol, drug toxicity, and the accumulation of copper (Wilson's Disease) or iron (hemochromatosis) are excluded.
  • NonAlcoholic Fatty Liver Disease refers to a wide spectrum of liver disease ranging from (and including) simple fatty liver (steatosis), to nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH), to cirrhosis (advanced scarring of the liver). All of the stages of NAFLD have fatty liver in common. In NASH, fat accumulation is associated with varying degrees of inflammation (hepatitis) which may lead to scarring (fibrosis) of the liver.
  • Steatosis can be most readily diagnosed with noninvasive imaging modalities, such as ultrasound, magnetic resonance imaging, or computed tomography as examples, or following a percutaneous biopsy.
  • noninvasive imaging modalities such as ultrasound, magnetic resonance imaging, or computed tomography as examples, or following a percutaneous biopsy.
  • ultrasound as an example of a noninvasive imaging diagnosis tool
  • the sonographic findings of diffuse fatty change include a diffuse hyperechoic echotexture (bright liver), increased liver echotexture compared with the kidneys, vascular blurring, and deep attenuation (Yajima et al., Tohoku J Exp Med 139(1):43-50 (1983)).
  • NAFLD percutaneous biopsy
  • histological features of NAFLD are indistinguishable from those of alcohol-induced liver disease, of which, predominant macrovesicular steatosis alone in >33% of hepatocytes will be used as the definition.
  • Other histologic features such as varying amounts of cytologic ballooning and spotty necrosis, scattered mixed neutrophilic-lymphocytic inflammation, glycogen nuclei, Mallory's hyaline, and perisinusoidal fibrosis may be present, but are not required for a diagnosis of NAFLD.
  • insulin resistance is defined clinically as the impaired ability of a known quantity of exogenous or endogenous insulin to increase whole body glucose uptake and utilization.
  • insulin regulates a wide variety of metabolic processes in addition to glucose homeostasis e.g., lipid and protein metabolism
  • the manifestations of insulin resistance are diverse and include one or more of the following: glucose intolerance, hyperinsulinemia, a characteristic dyslipidemia (high triglycerides; low high-density lipoprotein cholesterol, and small, dense low-density lipoprotein cholesterol), obesity, upper-body fat distribution, fat accumulation in the liver (non-alcoholic fatty liver disease), NASH (non-alcoholic steatohepatitis), increased hepatic glucose output, reduced hepatic glucose uptake and storage into glycogen, hypertension, and increased prothrombotic and antifibrinolytic factors.
  • This cluster of cardiovascular-metabolic abnormalities is commonly referred to as “The Insulin Resistance Syndrome” or “The Metabolic Syndrome” and may lead to the development of
  • Metabolic Syndrome or “Metabolic Syndrome X” is characterized by a group of metabolic risk factors in one person. They include:
  • Metal Syndrome or “Metabolic Syndrome X” is identified by the presence of three or more of these components:
  • thyroid responsive element refers to an element that usually consists of directly repeated half-sites with the consensus sequence AGGTCA. (Harbers et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 24(12):2252-2259 (1996)). TREs contain two half-sites of the AGGTCA motif which can be arranged as direct repeats, inverted repeats, or everted repeats.
  • thyroid responsive genes refers to genes whose expression is affected by triiodothyronine (Menjo et al., Thyroid 9(9):959-67 (1999); Helbing et al., Mol. Endocrinol. 17(7):1395-409 (2003)).
  • TSH thyroid stimulating hormone
  • Atherogenic proteins refers to proteins that induce, stimulate, enhance or prolong atherosclerosis and diseases related to atherosclerosis, including but not limited to coronary heart disease. Atherogenic proteins include apoAI and Lp (a).
  • thyroid hormone includes for example natural iodinated thyronines from thyroglobulin (e.g., T3, T4), as well as drugs such as Levothyroxine sodium which is the sodium salt of a levorotatory isomer of T4 and a commonly used drug as replacement therapy in hypothyroidism. Other uses include the treatment of simple nonendemic goiter, chronic lymphocytic thyroiditis and thyrotropin-dependent thyroid carcinoma.
  • Liothyronine sodium is the sodium salt of a levorotatory isomer of T3.
  • Liotrix is a 4:1 mixture of levothyroxine and liothronine.
  • Thyroid is a preparation derived from dried and defatted thyroid glands of animals.
  • thyromimetic or “T3 mimetic” as used herein, is intended to cover any moiety which binds to a thyroid receptor and acts as an agonist, antagonist, partial agonist/antagonist, or inverse agonist of T3.
  • the thyromimetic may be further specified as an agonist, an antagonist, a partial agonist, or a partial antagonist.
  • the thyromimetics of the present invention presumably bind the T3 binding site and can inhibit T3 binding to a thyroid hormone receptor utilizing a heterologous displacement reaction.
  • Thyromimetics of the present invention that can produce one of or more of the effects mediated by naturally occurring T3 in a target tissue or cell would be considered an agonist or partial agonist.
  • Thyromimetics of the present invention that can inhibit one of more of the effects mediated by naturally occurring T3 in a target tissue or cell would be considered an antagonist, partial agonist, or inverse agonist. Thyromimetics do not include T3, T4, or other naturally occurring thyroid hormones.
  • metabolic disease includes diseases and conditions such as obesity, diabetes and lipid disorders such as hypercholesterolemia, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia as well as disorders that are associated with abnormal levels of lipoproteins, lipids, carbohydrates and insulin such as metabolic syndrome X, diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease, cardiovascular disease.
  • diseases and conditions such as obesity, diabetes and lipid disorders such as hypercholesterolemia, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia as well as disorders that are associated with abnormal levels of lipoproteins, lipids, carbohydrates and insulin such as metabolic syndrome X, diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease, cardiovascular disease.
  • mitochondrial biogenesis refers to the rate at which nascent mitochondria are synthesized. Mitochondrial biogenesis that occurs during cell replication provides enough new mitochondria for both the parent and daughter cells. Mitochondrial biogenesis that occurs in the absence of cell replication leads to an increase in the number of mitochondria within a cell.
  • the term “significant” or “statistically significant” means a result (i.e. experimental assay result) where the p-value is ⁇ 0.05 (i.e. the chance of a type I error is less than 5%) as determined by an art-accepted measure of statistical significance appropriate to the experimental design.
  • the present invention relates to methods of decreasing the fat content of the liver in an animal comprising administering thyromimetic compounds, pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the prodrugs, where the compounds bind to a thyroid hormone receptor.
  • the present invention further relates to methods of preventing, treating, or ameliorating fatty liver diseases in an animal comprising administering thyromimetic compounds, pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the prodrugs, where the compounds bind to a thyroid hormone receptor.
  • Thyroid hormones and thyroid hormone mimetics bind to thyroid hormone receptors in the nucleus of cells and can change expression levels of genes encoding proteins that play an important role in metabolic diseases. By altering the expression of thyroid hormone-responsive genes in the liver, thyromimetic compounds can decrease the level of fat in the liver.
  • Fatty liver diseases that can be prevented, treated, or ameliorated with thyroid hormone mimetics include steatosis, non-alcoholic fatty liver disease, and non-alcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH).
  • the thyromimetic compounds, pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the prodrugs used in these methods bind to at least one thyroid hormone receptor with an Ki of ⁇ 100 nM relative to T3, or ⁇ 90 nM, ⁇ 80 nM, ⁇ 70 nM, ⁇ 60 nM, ⁇ 50 nM, ⁇ 40 nM, ⁇ 30 nM, ⁇ 20 nM, ⁇ 10 nM, ⁇ 50 nM, ⁇ 1 nM, ⁇ 0.5 nM.
  • Thyroid hormone receptor binding is readily determined using assays described in the literature. For example, nuclear extracts from animal livers can be prepared according to the methods described by Yokoyama et al.
  • Binding assays can also be performed using purified thyroid hormone receptors. For example, using the methods used by Chiellini et al. ( Bioorg. Med. Chem., 10: 333-346 (2002)) competition ligand binding affinities are determined using 125 I-T3 and the human thyroid receptors TR ⁇ 1 and TR ⁇ 1. The latter methods advantageously enable determination of thyroid receptor selectivity.
  • the thyromimetic compounds, pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the prodrugs used in these methods cause at least a 50%, 2 fold, 3 fold, 4 fold, 6 fold or 8 fold increase or decrease in the expression of one or more thyroid hormone-responsive genes. Changes in gene expression can be detected in cells or in vivo. Prodrugs of the thyromimetics can increase cellular uptake but in some cases are poorly converted to the active compound due to low levels of the enzymes required for the conversion. Changes in gene expression in vivo require either the compounds of the invention to be taken up by the tissue following administration or for the prodrug to remain intact after administration long enough to distribute to the target organ and cell.
  • prodrugs of the present invention that are activated in the liver and excreted by the liver as active compounds are retransported back across the cellular and nuclear membrane and into the nucleus.
  • the liver is a major target organ of thyroid hormone with an estimated 8% of the hepatic genes regulated by thyroid hormone. Quantitative fluorescent-labeled cDNA microarray hybridization was used to identify thyroid-responsive genes in the liver as shown in Table 1 below (Feng et al., Mol. Endocrinol., 14: 947-955 (2000)). Hepatic RNA from T3-treated and hypothyroid mice were used in the study. Thyroid hormone treatment affected the expression of 55 genes from the 2225 different mouse genes sampled with 14 increasing >2-fold and 41 decreasing >60%.
  • Genes reported to be affected by thyroid hormone are identified using a variety of techniques include microarray analysis. Studies have identified genes that are affected by T3 and T3 mimetics that are important in metabolic diseases.
  • T3-responsive genes in the liver include genes affecting lipogenesis, including spot 14, fatty acid transport protein, malic enzyme, fatty acid synthase (Blennemann et al., Mol. Cell. Endocrinol. 110(1-2):1-8 (1995)) and CYP4A. HMG CoA reductase and LDL receptor genes have been identified as affecting cholesterol synthesis and as being responsive to T3.
  • CPT-1 is a T3 responsive gene involved in fatty acid oxidation.
  • Genes affecting energy expenditure including mitochondrial genes such as mitochondrial sn-glycerol 3-phosphate dehydrogenase (mGPDH), and/or enzymes associated with proton leakage such as the adenine nucleotide transporter (ANT), Na + /K + -ATPase, Ca 2+ -ATPase and ATP synthase are also T3 responsive genes.
  • T3 responsive genes affecting glycogenolysis and gluconeogenesis include glucose 6-phosphatase and PEPCK.
  • Compounds used in the methods bind to thyroid receptors and produce a change in some hepatic gene expression.
  • Evidence for agonist activity is obtained using standard assays described in the literature.
  • One assay commonly used entails a reporter cell assay wherein cells, e.g., HeLa cells, Hek293 cells, Chinese hamster ovary cells, are transfected with an expression vector for human TR ⁇ 1 or TR ⁇ 1 and subsequently with a reporter vector encoding a secreted form of alkaline phosphatase containing whose expression is under the control of a thyroid hormone response element.
  • Agonist activity is measured by exposing the cells to the compounds, especially prodrugs of the compounds that are cleaved to the active compound by cell homogenates, followed by determining alkaline phosphatase activity in the cell culture medium using a chemiluminescent assay (Grover et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 100(17):10067-72 (2003)).
  • T3 mimetics in these methods would minimize effects on thyroid function, thyroid production of circulating iodinated thyronines such as T3 and T4, and/or the ratio of T3 to T4.
  • Some T3 mimetics distribute more readily to the liver and result in pharmacological effects at doses that do not adversely affect thyroid function, thyroid production of circulating iodinated thyronines such as T3 and T4, and/or the ratio of T3 to T4.
  • the compounds used in the present invention have a therapeutic index, defined as the difference between the dose at which a significant effect is observed for a use disclosed herein, e.g., decreasing fat content in the liver, and the dose at which a significant decrease in T3 or significant decrease in T4, or significant change in the ratio of T3 to T4 is observed, is at least 50 fold, 100 fold, 200 fold, 300 fold, 400 fold, 500 fold, 600 fold, 700 fold, 800 fold, 900 fold, 1000 fold, 2000 fold, 3000 fold, 4000 fold, 5000 fold, 6000 fold, 7000 fold, 8000 fold, 9000 fold or at least 10000 fold.
  • the amount of change in T3 or T4 is a decrease selected from; at least 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25% or at least 30% of circulating levels.
  • T3 and T3 mimetics have been limited by the deleterious side-effects on the heart. Attempts to overcome this limitation have focused on selectively targeting the liver over the heart using T3 mimetics that selectively bind TR ⁇ , over TR ⁇ . Because the heart expresses mainly TR ⁇ , previous investigators have attempted to increase the therapeutic index of T3 mimetics by increasing the selectively of the compounds for TR ⁇ which is expressed in the liver. Other work has led to the discovery of phosphorus-containing compounds, including prodrugs, that selectively distribute to the liver over the heart. These compounds are able to selectively target the liver and thereby increase the therapeutic index as compared to T3 and T3 mimetics containing a carboxylic acid. Compounds having increased liver selectivity, e.g., due to liver-selective distribution or TR selectivity, can therefore be dosed at levels that are effective in treating metabolic and other disorders where the liver is the drug target without significantly negatively affecting heart function.
  • T3-cardiac action provides a means for evaluating the functional consequences of T3-cardiac action, including measurement of cardiac hypertrophy (heart weight to body weight ratio), heart rate, and various hemodynamic parameters, including systolic and diastolic arterial pressure, end-systolic left ventricular pressure and maximal speeds of contraction and relaxation using methods described by Trost et al., ( Endocrinology 141:3057-64 (2000)).
  • the therapeutic index is determined by administering to animals a wide range of doses and determining the minimal dose capable of inducing a response in the liver relative to the dose capable of inducing a response in the heart.
  • thyromimetic compounds are often poorly transported into cultured cells. Accordingly, cell reporter assays, while often useful for confirming agonist activity, may not provide a suitable indication of potency. Thus, evidence of agonist activity is often more readily obtained in vivo.
  • In vivo assays include but are not limited to treating animals with a thyromimetic or a prodrug and monitoring the expression of T3-responsive genes in the liver or the functional consequences of changes of T3-responsive genes.
  • compounds useful in the methods of the invention bind to thyroid receptors and produce changes in the expression of two or more hepatic genes.
  • Animals used for testing compounds useful in the methods include normal rats and mice, animals made hypothyroid using methods well described in the literature, including thyroid hormone receptor knockout mice (e.g., TR ⁇ ⁇ / ⁇ such as those used in Grover et al., 2003), or animals exhibiting high cholesterol (e.g., high cholesterol fed rat or hamster), obesity and/or diabetes (e.g., fa/fa rat, Zucker diabetic fatty rat, ob/ob mice, db/db mice, high fat fed rodent). (Liureau et al., Biochem Pharmacol.
  • the drug or prodrug is administered by a variety of routes including by bolus injection, oral, and continuous infusion. Animals are treated for 1-28 days and the liver, heart and blood are isolated. Changes in gene transcription relative to vehicle treated animals and T3-treated animals are determined using northern blot analysis, RNase protection or reverse-transcription and subsequent PCR. While methods are available for monitoring changes in thousands of hepatic genes, only a small number need to be monitored to demonstrate the biological effect of compounds in this invention. Typically, genes such as spot-14, FAS, mGPDH, CPT-1, and LDL receptor are monitored.
  • Changes of >1.5 fold in two or more genes is considered proof that the compound modulates T3-responsive genes in vivo.
  • Alternative methods for measuring changes in gene transcription include monitoring the activity or expression level of the protein encoded by the gene. For instance, in cases where the genes encode enzyme activities (e.g., FAS, mGPDH), direct measurements of enzyme activity in appropriately extracted liver tissue can be made using standard enzymological techniques. In cases where the genes encode receptor functions (e.g., the LDL receptor) ligand binding studies or antibody-based assays (e.g., Western blots) can be performed to quantify the number of receptors expressed. Depending on the gene, TR agonists will either increase or decrease enzyme activity or increase or decrease receptor binding or number.
  • hepatic genes responsive to T3 are many-fold and readily demonstrated using assays well described in the literature.
  • Administering thyromimetic compounds that bind to a TR to animals can result in changes in lipids, including hepatic and/or plasma cholesterol levels; changes in lipoprotein levels including LDL-cholesterol, lipoprotein a (Lp(a)); changes in hepatic glycogen levels; and changes in energy expenditure as measured by changes in oxygen consumption and in some cases animal weight.
  • the effect on cholesterol is determined using cholesterol fed animals such as normal rats and hamsters, or TR ⁇ ⁇ / ⁇ knockout mice.
  • Cholesterol is measured using standard tests.
  • Hepatic glycogen levels are determined from livers isolated from treated animals.
  • MV O 2 Changes in energy expenditure are monitored by measuring changes in oxygen consumption (MV O 2 ).
  • Oxymax chambers U.S. Pat. No. 6,441,015.
  • Livers from treated rats can also be evaluated (Fernandez et al., Toxicol Lett. 69(2):205-10 (1993)) as well as isolated mitochondria from liver (Carreras et al., Am. J. Physiol. Heart Circ. Physiol. 281(6):H2282-8 (2001)).
  • Hepatocytes from treated rats can also be evaluated (Ismail-Beigi et al., J. Gen. Physiol. 73(3):369-83 (1979)).
  • fatty liver disease e.g., steatosis, NASH or NAFLD
  • the method comprising the step of administering to a patient an amount of a thyromimetic compound, a prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or co-crystal thereof.
  • said compound is an active form.
  • said compound is a prodrug.
  • said compound or a prodrug thereof comprises a stereocenter.
  • said compound is administered as a racemic mixture.
  • said compound is administered as an enantiomerically enriched mixture.
  • said compound is administered as a diastereomeric mixture.
  • said compound is administered as an individual stereoisomer.
  • T3 administration may have some effect on fat content in liver, such effect would only occur at high doses of T3, i.e., doses at which T3-related toxicities occur. Further, even if T3 administration lowers fat content in liver, the activity decreases over time, e.g., in the space of four to five weeks.
  • thyromimetic compounds are administered at doses that significantly reduce fat content in the liver but are below the doses at which an effect is observed with T3.
  • thyromimetic compounds are administered that maintain fat-reducing activity for long periods of time, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 weeks or longer without any loss in efficacy.
  • thyromimetic compounds are administered that maintain fat-reducing activity for long periods of time, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 weeks or longer, wherein efficacy of the compounds decreases over time but at a slower rate than the decrease in efficacy observed with T3.
  • the decrease in efficacy may be about 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, or 400% or more slower than the decrease in efficacy observed with T3.
  • the thyromimetic compounds reduce fat content in liver without significantly affecting peripheral fat, visceral fat, or epididymal fat.
  • the thyromimetic compounds reduce fat content in the liver at a faster rate than the decrease in fat content in other tissues or areas of the body, e.g., skin, abdomen, heart, vasculature, epididymis.
  • the thyromimetic compounds cause an increase in oxidation of free fatty acids in the liver.
  • the thyromimetic compounds increase oxidation of triglycerides, cholesterol esters, and/or long chain acetyl-CoA esters in the liver. In certain embodiments, oxidation is increased by about 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, or 400% or more.
  • the thyromimetic compounds reduce fat content in liver in the absence of any negative effects on the heart. Negative effects include one or more of significant increase in heart rate, significant raising of blood pressure, significant increase in heart rate, significant increase in left ventricular contractility, significant increase in systolic blood pressure, and significant increase in diastolic blood pressure.
  • the thyromimetic compounds reduce fat content in liver in the absence of any significant change in total body weight, significant change in TSH or TRH levels, significant change in liver enzymes, significant change in serum free fatty acid levels, or significant liver mitochondrial damage.
  • compositions a compound useful in the present invention. Also provided are pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention having an oral bioavailability of least 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70% 75% or at least 80%.
  • compositions comprising a first compound useful in the present invention and a second compound useful for decreasing the fat content of the liver, useful for the prevention, treatment, or amelioration of a fatty liver disease such as steatosis, NASH, or NAFLD, or useful for the prevention, treatment, or amelioration of a disease or disorder that is related to or results in fatty liver disease.
  • a composition comprising said first and second compound is a single unit dose.
  • said unit does is in the form of a tablet, hard capsule or soft gel capsule.
  • kits for decreasing that fat content of liver or for the prevention, treatment, or amelioration of a fatty liver disease such as steatosis, NASH, or NAFLD comprising:
  • a) a first pharmaceutical composition comprising a thyromimetic compound or a prodrug thereof;
  • a second pharmaceutical composition comprising an additional compound useful for decreasing the fat content of the liver, useful for the prevention, treatment, or amelioration of a fatty liver disease such as steatosis, NASH, or NAFLD, or useful for the prevention, treatment, or amelioration of a disease or disorder that is related to or results in fatty liver disease; and
  • a compound of the present invention for the manufacture of a medicament for decreasing the fat content of liver or for the prevention, treatment or amelioration of a fatty liver disease such as steatosis, NASH, and NAFLD.
  • compounds used in the present methods are compounds that selectively distribute to the liver.
  • the compounds have at least 10 fold, 25 fold, 50 fold, 75 fold, 100 fold, 200 fold, 300 fold, 400 fold, 500 fold, 600 fold, 700 fold, 800 fold, 900 fold, 1000 fold, 2000 fold, 3000 fold, 4000 fold, 5000 fold 6000 fold, 7000 fold, 8000 fold, 9000 fold, 10,000 fold, 20,000 fold, 30,000 fold, 40,000 fold or 50,000 fold greater selectivity.
  • the selectivity for the liver is compared to the heart.
  • the selectivity for the liver is compared to the pituitary.
  • the selectivity for the liver is compared to the kidney.
  • compounds used in the present methods are compounds of the present invention that bind at least one thyroid hormone receptor with an Ki of ⁇ 100 nM, ⁇ 90 nM, ⁇ 80 nM, ⁇ 70 nM, ⁇ 60 nM, ⁇ 50 nM, ⁇ 40 nM, ⁇ 30 nM, ⁇ 20 nM, ⁇ 10 nM, ⁇ 50 nM, ⁇ 1 nM, or ⁇ 0.5 nM relative to T3.
  • said thyroid hormone receptor is TR ⁇ .
  • said thyroid hormone receptor is TR ⁇ .
  • thyroid hormone receptor with an Ki of ⁇ 100 nM, ⁇ 90 nM, ⁇ 80 nM, ⁇ 70 nM, ⁇ 60 nM, ⁇ 50 nM, ⁇ 40 nM, ⁇ 30 nM, ⁇ 20 nM, ⁇ 10 nM, ⁇ 50 nM, ⁇ 1 nM, or ⁇ 0.5 nM relative to T3, but in each case ⁇ 150 nM.
  • said thyroid hormone receptor is TR ⁇ .
  • said thyroid hormone receptor is TR ⁇ .
  • said thyroid hormone receptor is TR ⁇ 1.
  • said thyroid hormone receptor is TR ⁇ 1.
  • said thyroid hormone receptor is TR ⁇ 2.
  • said thyroid hormone receptor is TR ⁇ 2.
  • Novel methods described herein describe the use of thyromimetic compounds that bind to TRs.
  • compounds described below include compounds of Formula I-IX.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used in the methods described herein.
  • the compounds useful in the invention are thyromimetic compounds that bind to and activate thyroid receptors in the liver.
  • the present invention relates to compounds of Formula I-IX, including stereoisomers and mixtures of stereoisomers thereof, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, co-crystals thereof, and prodrugs (including stereoisomers and mixtures of stereoisomers thereof) thereof, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and co-crystals of the prodrugs.
  • compositions comprising a crystalline form a compound of the present invention may contain only one crystalline form of said compound or more than one crystalline form.
  • the composition may contain two or more different polymorphs.
  • the polymorphs may be two different polymorphs of the free form, two or more polymorphs of different co-crystal forms, two or more polymorphs of different salt forms, a combination of one or more polymorphs of one or more co-crystal forms and one or more polymorphs of the free form, a combination of one or more polymorphs of one or more salt forms and one or more polymorphs of the free form, or a combination of one or more polymorphs of one or more co-crystal forms and one or more polymorphs of one or more salt forms.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts of the compounds herein are included in the present invention.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts refers to those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free acids, which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. These salts are prepared from addition of an inorganic base or an organic base to the free acid. Salts derived from inorganic bases include, but are not limited to: sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium, magnesium, zinc, aluminum salts and the like. Preferred inorganic salts are the ammonium, sodium, potassium, calcium, and magnesium salts.
  • Salts derived from organic bases include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, substituted amines including naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines and basic ion exchange resins, such as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, tripropylamine, ethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, 2-diethylaminoethanol, trimethamine, dicyclohexylamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, methylglucamine, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, N-ethylpiperidine, polyamine resins and the like.
  • basic ion exchange resins such as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, tripropylamine
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of the compounds herein having a base functional group are also included in the present invention.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts refer to those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free base, which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. These salts are prepared from addition of an inorganic acid or an organic acid to the free base.
  • Salts derived from inorganic acids include, but are not limited to: acistrate, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, nitrate, acetate, oxalate, besylate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, borate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, naphthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, laurylsulphonate. bromide, fumarate, pamoate, glucuronate, hydroiodide, iodide, sulfate, xinofoate and chloride salts.
  • the compounds of the present invention may be pure or substantially pure or have a purity of at least 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or a purity at least 99.5%.
  • the compounds may also be part of a pharmaceutically acceptable composition.
  • the compounds may also be part of a biological material or sample.
  • included in the present invention are cells and tissues comprising a compound of the present invention.
  • the cells or tissues can be in vivo, ex vivo or in vitro. Examples include liver or liver cells (e.g., hepatocytes), blood, gastric fluid (simulated or actual), intestinal fluid (simulated or actual) and urine.
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula I:
  • Ar 1 and Ar 2 are substituted aryl groups
  • G is an atom or group of atoms that links Ar 1 and Ar 2 through a single C, S, Se, O, or N atom or CH 2 linked to C, S, Se, O, or N, wherein the C or N is substituted;
  • T is an atom or group of atoms linking Ar 2 to E through 1-4 contiguous atoms or is absent;
  • E is a functional group or moiety with a pKa ⁇ 7.4, carboxylic acid or esters thereof, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof, or an atom or group of atoms containing an O or N that binds the thyroid hormone binding pocket of a TR ⁇ or TR ⁇ .
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula II:
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, -Se-, —S( ⁇ O)—, —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, -Se-, —CH 2 —, —CF 2 —, —CHF—, —C(O)—, —CH(OH)—, —CH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, —CH(C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-, —C( ⁇ CH 2 )—, —NH—, and —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, or CH 2 linked to any of the preceding groups;
  • R 50 —R 11 together are —C(R 52 ) ⁇ C(R 52 )— or alternatively R 50 and R 51 are independently selected from O, S and —CH(R 53 )—, with the provisos that at least one R 50 and R 51 is —CH(R 53 )—, and when one of R 50 and R 51 is O or S, then R 53 is R 54 ;
  • R 54 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl;
  • R 53 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • R 52 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) k —, —CR b ⁇ CR b (CR a 2 ) n —, —(CR a 2 ) n —CR b ⁇ CR b —, (CR a 2 )—CR b ⁇ CR b —(CR a 2 ) k —, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) n —, —(CR a 2 ) m C(R b )(NR b R c )—, C(O)(CR a 2 ) m —, —(CR a 2 ) m C(
  • k is an integer from 0-4;
  • n is an integer from 0-3;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halogen, —OH, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —NR b R c , optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, and optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —C(O)—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 6 , and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, hydroxy and cyano; or
  • R 6 and T are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form a ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 6 and T are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR i —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; and X is attached to this ring by a direct bond to a ring carbon, or by —(CR a 2 )— or —C(O)— bonded to a ring carbon or a ring nitrogen;
  • R i is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —C(O)C 1 -C 4 alkyl and —C 1 -C 4 alkyl; or
  • R 1 and R 7 are taken together along with the carbons to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 1 and R 7 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 8 and R 9 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted-O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, hydroxy, —(CR a 2 )aryl, —(CR2)cycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 )heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)aryl, —C(O)cycloalkyl, —C(O)heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)alkyl and cyano;
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CF 3 , —CB:F 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, cyano, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-aryl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-cycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-heterocycloalkyl,
  • Each R d is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, and —C(O)NR f R g ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ),aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ),cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ),heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring of 3-8 atoms containing 0-4 unsaturations, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , o
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl; or
  • R 3 and R 8 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 8 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, O—, and—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; or
  • R 5 and G are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of formula —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ , —N ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ , —CH ⁇ N—CH ⁇ or —CH ⁇ CH—N ⁇ ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, optionally substituted —OC 1 -C 6 alkyl, —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR h , —NHC(O)OR h , —OC(O)NH(R h ), —F, —NHC(O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —NHC( ⁇ S)NH(R h ), and —NHC(O)NH(R h ); or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; and
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula III:
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, -Se-, —S( ⁇ O)—, —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, -Se-, —CH 2 —, —CF 2 —, —CHF—, —C(O)—, —CH(OH)—, —CH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, —CH(C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-, —C( ⁇ CH 2 )—, —NH—, and —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, or CH 2 linked to any of the preceding groups;
  • R 50 -R 51 together are —C(R 52 ) ⁇ C(R 52 )— or alternatively R 50 and R 51 are independently selected from O, S and —CH(R 53 )—, with the provisos that at least one R 50 and R 51 is —CH(R 53 )—, and when one of R 50 and R 51 is O or S, then R 53 is R 54 ;
  • R 54 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl;
  • R 53 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • R 52 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) k —, —CR b ⁇ CR b (CR a 2 ) n , —(CR a 2 ) n —CR b ⁇ CR b —, —(CR a 2 )—CR b ⁇ CR b —(CR a 2 )—, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n , —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) n —, —(CR a 2 ) m C(R b )(NR b R c )—, —C(O)(CR a 2 ) m —, —(CR a 2 ) m C(R b
  • k is an integer from 0-4;
  • n is an integer from 0-3;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halogen, —OH, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —NR b R c , optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, and optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —C(O)—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, cyano, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-aryl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-cycloalkyl, —C(C b ) ⁇ C(R b )-heterocycloalkyl, —C
  • Each R d is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, and —C(O)NR f R g ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring of 3-8 atoms containing 0-4 unsaturations, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, optionally substituted —OC 1 -C 6 alkyl, —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR h , —NHC(O)OR h , —OC(O)NH(R h ), —F, —NHC(O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —NHC( ⁇ S)NH(R h ), and —NHC(O)NH(R h ); or
  • R 3 and R 1 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; and
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S, and —CH 2 ;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) n —, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) p —, —(CR a 2 )CH(NR b R c )—, and —C(O)NH(CR b 2 )—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , halogen, —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , and —NR b R c C; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 ;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 , —C(O)—CH 3 , and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ),cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 1 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; and
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S, and —CH 2 ;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of a bond, —(CH 2 ) n —, —OCH 2 —, —SCH 2 —, —NHCH 2 —, —NHC(O)(CH 2 ) p —, and —(CH 2 )CH(NH 2 )—, and —C(O)NH(CH 2 )—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )aryl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, F, Cl, Br, iodo, and CH 3 ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ),cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ),heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR e , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; and
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula IV:
  • A is selected from the group consisting of —NR i —, —O—, and —S—;
  • B is selected from the group consisting of —CR b —, and —N—;
  • R i is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —C(O)C 1 -C 4 alkyl and —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • R b is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, -Se-, —S( ⁇ O)—, —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —CF 2 —, —CHF—, —C(O)—, —CH(OH)—, —NH—, and —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, or CH 2 linked to any of the preceding groups;
  • R 50 -R 51 together are —C(R 52 ) ⁇ C(R 52 )— or alternatively R 50 and R 51 are independently selected from O, S and —CH(R 53 )—, with the provisos that at least one R 50 and R 51 is —CH(R 53 )—, and when one of R 50 and R 51 is O or S, then R 53 is R 54 ;
  • R 54 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl;
  • R 53 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • R 52 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • D is selected from the group consisting of a bond, —(CR a 2 )—, and —C(O)—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halogen, —OH, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —NR b R c , optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, and optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, and cyano;
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, cyano, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-aryl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-cycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-heterocycloalkyl, —C
  • Each R d is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ),cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, and —C(O)NR f R g ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring of 3-8 atoms containing 0-4 unsaturations, which may contain a second heterogroup selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo,
  • Each R b is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, optionally substituted —OC 1 -C 6 alkyl, —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR h , —NHC(O)OR h , —OC(O)NH(R h ), —F, —NHC(O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —NHC( ⁇ S)NH(R h ), and —NHC(O)NH(R h ); and
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • A is selected from the group consisting of —NR i —, —O—, and —S—,
  • B is selected from the group consisting of —CR b —, and —N—;
  • R i is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —C(O)C 1 -C 4 alkyl and —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • R b is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • D is selected from the group consisting of a bond, —(CR a 2 )—, and —C(O)—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , halogen, —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , and —NR b R c ; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 ;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , —C(O)—CH 3 , and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ,
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ),heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR b ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • A is selected from the group consisting of —NR i —, —O—, and —S—;
  • B is selected from the group consisting of —CR b —, and —N—;
  • R i is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —C(O)C 1 -C 4 alkyl and —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • R b is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • D is selected from the group consisting of a bond, —(CH 2 )—, and —C(O)—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )aryl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, F, Cl, Br, iodo, and CH 3 ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR e , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula V:
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, -Se-, —S( ⁇ O)—, —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —CF 2 —, —CHF—, —C(O)—, —CH(OH)—, —NH—, and —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, or CH 2 linked to any of the preceding groups;
  • R 50 -R 51 together are —C(R 52 ) ⁇ C(R 52 )— or alternatively R 50 and R 51 are independently selected from O, S and —CH(R 53 )—, with the provisos that at least one R 50 and R 51 is —CH(R 53 )—, and when one of R 50 and R 51 is O or S, then R 53 is R 54 ;
  • R 54 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl;
  • R 53 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • R 52 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) k —, —CR b ⁇ CR b ——(CR a 2 ) n —, —(CR a 2 ) n —CR b ⁇ CR b —, —(CR a 2 )—CR b ⁇ CR b —(CR a 2 )—, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) n —, —(CR a 2 ) m C(R b )(NR b R c )—, —C(O)(CR a 2 ) m —, —(CR a 2 )
  • k is an integer from 0-4;
  • n is an integer from 0-3;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halogen, —OH, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —NR b R c C, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, and optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —C(O)—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, and cyano;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted-O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, hydroxy, —(CR a 2 )aryl, —(CR a 2 )cycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 )heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)aryl, —C(O)cycloalkyl, —C(O)heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)alkyl and cyano;
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, cyano, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-aryl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-cycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-heterocycloalkyl, —C
  • Each R d is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, and —C(O)NR f R g ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 )naryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 )cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ),aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ),cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring of 3-8 atoms containing 0-4 unsaturations, which may contain a second heterogroup selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl; or
  • R 3 and R 8 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 8 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; or
  • R 8 and G are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring comprising —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ , —N ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ , —CH ⁇ N—CH ⁇ or —CH ⁇ CH—N—;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, optionally substituted —OC 1 -C 6 alkyl, —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR h , —NHC(O)OR h , —OC(O)NH(R h ), —F, —NHC(O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —NHC( ⁇ S)NH(R h ), and —NHC(O)NH(R h ); or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form a ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR i —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, amino, hydroxyl, —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —SH and —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) n —, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) p —, —(CR a 2 )CH(NR b R c )—, and —C(O)NH(CR b 2 )—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , halogen, —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , and —NR b R c ; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 ;
  • Each R e is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen , —CH 3 , —C(O)—CH 3 , and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ,
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, amino, hydroxyl, —O—CH 3 , —SH and —S—CH 3 ;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S, and —CH 2 ;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of a bond, —(CH 2 ) n —, —OCH 2 —, —SCH 2 —, —NHCH 2 —, —NHC(O)(CH 2 ) p —, —(CH 2 )CH(NH 2 )—, and —C(O)NH(CH 2 )—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano;
  • R 3 selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )aryl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, F, Cl, Br, iodo, and CH 3 ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR e , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R b is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, F, Cl, amino, hydroxyl, and —O—CH 3 ;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula VI:
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) k —, —CR b ⁇ CR b —(CR a 2 ) n —, —(CR a 2 ) n —CR b ⁇ CR b —, —(CR a 2 )—CR b ⁇ CR b —(CR a 2 )—, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) n —, —(CR a 2 ) m C(O)NR b R c )—, —C(O)(CR a 2 ) m —, —(CR a 2 ) m C(O
  • k is an integer from 0-4;
  • n is an integer from 0-3;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halogen, —OH, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —NR b R c , optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, and optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —C(O)—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, cyano, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-aryl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-cycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-heterocycloalkyl, —C ⁇ C(aryl
  • Each R d is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, and —C(O)NR f R g ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring of 3-8 atoms containing 0-4 unsaturations, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, optionally substituted —OC 1 -C 6 alkyl, —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR h , —NHC(O)OR h , —OC(O)NH(R h ), —F, —NHC(O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —NHC( ⁇ S)NH(R h ), and —NHC(O)NH(R h ); and
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) n —, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) p —, —(CR a 2 )C(R b )(NR b R c )—, and —C(O)N(R b )(CR b 2 )—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , halogen, —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , and —NR b R c ; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 ;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 , —C(O)—CH 3 , and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR 12 ),heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • T is selected from the group consisting of a bond, —(CH 2 ) n —, —OCH 2 —, —SCH 2 —, —NHCH 2 —, —NHC(O)(CH 2 ) p —, —(CH 2 )CH(NH 2 ) p —, and —C(O)NH(CH 2 )—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )aryl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR e , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula VII:
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, -Se-, —S( ⁇ O)—, —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, —CH 2 —, —CF 2 —, —CHF—, —C(O)—, —CH(OH)—, —NH—, and —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, or CH 2 linked to any of the preceding groups;
  • R 50 -R 51 together are —C(R 52 ) ⁇ C(R 52 )— or alternatively R 50 and R 51 are independently selected from O, S and —CH(R 53 )—, with the provisos that at least one R 50 and R 51 is —CH(R 53 )—, and when one of R 50 and R 51 is O or S, then R 53 is R 54 ;
  • R 54 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl;
  • R 53 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • R 52 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) k —, —CR b ⁇ CR b (CR a 2 ) n —, —S(CR a 2 ) n —CR b ⁇ CR b —, —(CR a 2 )—CR b ⁇ CR b —(CR a 2 )—, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) n —, —N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) n —, —(CR a 2 ) n C(R b )(NR b R c )—, —C(O)(CR a 2 ) m —, —(CR a 2 ) m
  • k is an integer from 0-4;
  • n is an integer from 0-3;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halogen, —OH, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —NR b R c , optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, and optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —C(O)—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, cyano, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-aryl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )— cycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )— cycloalkyl, —C(R b )
  • Each R d is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, and —C(O)NR f R g ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ),heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring of 3-8 atoms containing 0-4 unsaturations, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S.
  • optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, optionally substituted —OC 1 -C 6 alkyl, —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR h , —NHC(O)OR h , —OC(O)NH(R h ), —F, —NHC(O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —NHC( ⁇ S)NH(R h ), and —NHC(O)NH(R h ); or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, hydroxy, —(CR a 2 )aryl, —(CR a 2 )cycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 )heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)aryl, —C(O)cycloalkyl, —C(O)heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)alkyl and cyano; and
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) n —, —O(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —S(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )(CR a 2 ) p —, —N(R b )C(O)(CR a 2 ) p —, —(CR a 2 )C(R b )(NR b R c )—, and —C(O)N(R b )(CR b 2 );
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , halogen, —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , and —NR b R c ; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 ;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , —C(O)—CH 3 , and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —(CR a 2 )aryl, C(O)aryl and C(O)alkyl;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of a bond, —(CH 2 ) n —, —OCH 2 —, —SCH 2 —, —NHCH 2 —, —NHC(O)(CH 2 ) p —, —(CH 2 )CH(NH 2 )—, and —C(O)NH(CH 2 )—;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )aryl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ),aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR e , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —CH 2 -aryl, C(O)aryl and C(O)alkyl;
  • X is carboxylic acid or esters thereof, carboxylic acid amide, sulfonic acid, tetrazole, hydroxamic acid, oxamic acid, malonamic acid, 6-azauracil, thiazolidinedione, acylsulfonamide, other carboxylic acid surrogates known in the art, phosphonic acid, phosphonic acid monoester, phosphinic acid, or a prodrug thereof.
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula VIII:
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, -Se-, —S( ⁇ O)—, —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, -Se-, —CH 2 —, —CF 2 —, —CHF—, —C(O)—, —CH(OH)—, —CH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, —CH(C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-, —C(—CH 2 )—, —NH—, and —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, or CH 2 linked to any of the preceding groups;
  • R 50 -R 51 together are —C(R 52 ) ⁇ C(R 52 )— or alternatively R 50 and R 51 are independently selected from O, S and —CH(R 53 )—, with the provisos that at least one R 50 and R 51 is —CH(R 53 )—, and when one of R 50 and R 51 is O or S, then R 53 is R 54 ;
  • R 54 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl;
  • R 53 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • R 52 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • a and T are each independently selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 )—, —(CR a 2 ) 2 —, —O(CR b 2 )—, —S(CR b 2 )—, —N(R c )(CR b 2 )—, —N(R b )C(O)—, —C(O)(CR a 2 )—, —(CR a 2 )C(O)—, —(CR b 2 )O—, —(CR b 2 )S—, and —(CR b 2 )N(R c )—;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halogen, —OH, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —NR b R c , optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, and optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —C(O)—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 8 and R 9 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, hydroxy, —(CR a 2 )aryl, —(CR a 2 )cycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 )heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)aryl, —C(O)cycloalkyl, —C(O)heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)alkyl and cyano;
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, cyano, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-aryl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )— cycloalkyl, —(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-heterocycloalkyl, —C
  • Each R d is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, and —C(O)NR f R g ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocyclo alkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring of 3-8 atoms containing 0-4 unsaturations, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl; or
  • R 3 and R 8 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; or
  • R 8 and G are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of formula —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ , —N ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ , —CH ⁇ N—CH ⁇ or —CH ⁇ CH—N ⁇ ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, optionally substituted —OC 1 -C 6 alkyl, —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR h , —NHC(O)OR h , —OC(O)NH(R h ), —F, —NHC(O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —NHC( ⁇ S)NH(R h ), and —NHC(O)NH(R h ); or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 1 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR v —;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted CH 2 -heterocycloalkyl wherein the cyclic moiety contains a carbonate or thiocarbonate, optionally substituted -alkylaryl, —C(R z ) 2 OC(O)NR z 2 , —NR z —C(O)—R y , —C(R z ) 2 —OC(O)R y , —C(R z ) 2 —O—C(O)OR y , —C(R z ) 2 OC(O)SR y , -alkyl-S—C(O)R y , -alkyl-S—S-alkylhydroxy, and -alkyl-S—S—S-alkylhydroxy;
  • R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, —[C(R z ) 2 ] q —C(O)OR y , —C(R x ) 2 C(O)OR y , —[C(R z ) 2 ] q —C(O)SR y , and -cycloalkylene-C(O)OR y ;
  • n is an integer from 0-3;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • q is an integer 2 or 3;
  • Each R z is selected from the group consisting of R y and —H;
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, heterocycloalkyl, and aralkyl;
  • Each R x is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, and alkyl, or together R x and R x form a cycloalkyl group;
  • Each R V is selected from the group consisting of —H, lower alkyl, acyloxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl, and lower acyl;
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • a and T are each independently selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 )—, —(CR a 2 ) 2 —, —O(CR b 2 )—, —S(CR b 2 )—, —(R c )(CR b 2 )—, —N(R b )C(O)—, —C(O)(CR a 2 )—, —(CR a 2 )C(O)—, —(CR b 2 )O—, —(CR b 2 )S—, and —(CR b 2 )N(R c )—;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , halogen, —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , and —NR b R c with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 ;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 , —C(O)—CH 3 , and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl; or
  • R 3 and R 8 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 1 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; or
  • R 8 and G are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of formula —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR v —;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, —C(R z ) 2 —OC(O)R y , —C(R z ) 2 —O—C(O)OR y , and -alkyl-S—C(O)R y ;
  • R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, —C(R z ) 2 —COOR y , and —C(R x ) 2 COOR y ;
  • Each R z is selected from the group consisting of R y and —H;
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and aryl;
  • Each R x is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and alkyl
  • Each R V is selected from the group consisting of —H and lower alkyl
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • a and T are each independently selected from the group consisting of —CH 2 —, —(CH 2 ) 2 —, —OCH 2 —, —SCH 2 —, —NH(CH 2 )—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)CH 2 —, —CH 2 C(O)—, —CH 2 O—, —CH 2 S—, and —CH 2 )NH—;
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 8 and R 9 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , (CH 2 )aryl, C(O)aryl, C(O)alkyl;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )aryl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R K ;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, F, Cl, Br, iodo, and CH 3 ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR e , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl; or
  • R 3 and R 1 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 6 atoms with 2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 8 are attached, including 0 to 1 —N—; or
  • R 8 and G are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of formula —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR v —;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, —CH 2 —OC(O)R y , —CH(CH 3 )—OC(O)R y , —CH 2 —O—C(O)OR y , —CH(CH 3 )—O—C(O)OR y , and —(CH 2 ) 2 —S—C(O)R y ;
  • R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and —C(R x ) 2 COOR y ;
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, heterocycloalkyl, and aralkyl;
  • the invention relates to the use of a compound of Formula IX:
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, -Se-, —S( ⁇ O)—, —S( ⁇ O) 2 —, -Se-, —CH 2 —, —CF 2 —, —CHF—, —C(O)—, —CH(OH)—, —CH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, —CH(C 1 -C 4 alkoxy)-, —C( ⁇ CH 2 )—, —NH—, and —N(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-, or CH 2 linked to any of the preceding groups;
  • R 50 -R 51 together are —C(R 52 ) ⁇ C(R 52 )— or alternatively R 50 and R 51 are independently selected from O, S and —CH(R 53 )—, with the provisos that at least one R 50 and R 51 is —CH(R 53 )—, and when one of R 50 and R 51 is O or S, then R 53 is R 54 ;
  • R 54 is hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl;
  • R 53 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • R 52 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, fluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methylthio, fluoromethylthio, difluoromethylthio and trifluoromethylthio;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) n C(R b 2 )O—, —(CR a 2 ) n C(R b 2 )N(R b )—, —(CR a 2 ) n C(R b 2 )S—, —C(O)(CR a 2 ) p C(R b 2 )O—, —C(O)(CR a 2 ) p C(R b 2 )N(R b )—, —C(O)(CR a 2 ) p C(R b 2 )S—, —(CR a 2 ) p C(O)C(R b 2 )O—, —(CR a 2 ) p C(O)C(R b 2 )N(R b )—, and —(CR a 2 ) p C(O)C(R b 2 )S—,
  • k is an integer from 0-4;
  • n is an integer from 0-3;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, halogen, —OH, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 4 alkyl —NR b R c C, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, and optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —C(O)—C 1 -C 4 alkyl, and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 6 , and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 8 and R 9 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted —S—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 4 alkynyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, optionally substituted —O—C 1 -C 3 alkyl, hydroxy, —(CR a 2 )aryl, —(CR a 2 )cycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 )heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)aryl, —C(O)cycloalkyl, —C(O)heterocycloalkyl, —C(O)alkyl and cyano; or
  • R 1 and R 7 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 1 and R 7 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —OCF 3 , —OCHF 2 , —OCH 2 F, cyano, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )-aryl, —C(R b ) ⁇ C(R b )— cycloalkyl, —C(R b ) 50 C(R b )-heterocycloalkyl, —
  • Each R d is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, and —C(O)NR f R g ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl , and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl,
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring of 3-8 atoms containing 0-4 unsaturations, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl; or
  • R 3 and R 8 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; or
  • R 8 and G are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of formula —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ , —N ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ , —CH—N—CH ⁇ or —CH—CH—N ⁇ ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, optionally substituted —OC 1 -C 6 alkyl, —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR h , —NHC(O)OR h , —OC(O)NH(R h ), —F, —NHC(O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O)R e , —NHS( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —NHC( ⁇ S)NH(R h ), and —NHC(O)NH(R h ); or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 to 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • X is P(O)(YR 11 )Y′′
  • Y′′ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —CH 2 OH, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted (CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O)R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)NR f R g , and —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)R e ;
  • Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR c —;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted CH 2 -heterocycloakyl wherein the cyclic moiety contains a carbonate or thiocarbonate, optionally substituted -alkylaryl, —C(R z ) 2 OC(O)NR z 2 , —NR z C(O)—R y , —C(R z ) 2 —OC(O)R y , —C(R z ) 2 —O—C(O)OR y , —C(R z ) 2 OC(O)SR y , -alkyl-S—C(O)R y , -alkyl-S—S-alkylhydroxy, and -alkyl-S—S—S-alkylhydroxy;
  • R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, —[C(R z ) 2 ] q —C(O)OR y , —C(R x ) 2 C(O)OR y , —[C(R z ) 2 ] q —C(O)SR y , and -cycloalkylene-C(O)OR y ;
  • q is an integer 2 or 3;
  • Each R z is selected from the group consisting of R y and —H;
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, heterocycloalkyl, and aralkyl;
  • Each R x is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, and alkyl, or together R x and R x form a cycloalkyl group;
  • Each R V is selected from the group consisting of —H, lower alkyl, acyloxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl, and lower acyl;
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —(CR a 2 ) n C(R b 2 )O—, —(CR a 2 ) n C(R b 2 )N(R b )—, and —(CR a 2 ) n C(R b 2 )S—;
  • k is an integer from 0-4;
  • n is an integer from 0-3;
  • n is an integer from 0-2;
  • p is an integer from 0-1;
  • Each R a is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, —CH 3 , halogen, —OH, —OCH 3 , —OCF 3 , and —NR b R c ; with the proviso that when one R a is attached to C through an O, S, or N atom, then the other R a attached to the same C is a hydrogen, or attached via a carbon atom;
  • Each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 ;
  • Each R c is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and —CH 3 , —C(O)—CH 3 , and —C(O)H;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 6 , and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 8 and R 9 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , (CR a 2 )aryl, C(O)aryl, C(O)alkyl and cyano; or
  • R 1 and R 7 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 0-1 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 1 and R 7 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) m heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, and optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR b , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CR b 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl; or
  • R 3 and R 8 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 6 atoms with 0-2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 8 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom; or
  • R 8 and G are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of formula —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • X is P(O)(YR 11 )Y′′
  • Y′′ is hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —CH 2 OH, —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 N f R g , or —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)NR g R g ;
  • Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR v —,
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, —C(R z ) 2 —OC(O)R y , —C(R z ) 2 —O—C(O)OR y , and -alkyl-S—C(O)R y ;
  • R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, —(R z ) 2 —C(O)OR y , and —C(R x ) 2 C(O)OR y ;
  • Each R z is selected from the group consisting of R y and —H;
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and aryl;
  • Each R x is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and alkyl
  • Each R V is selected from the group consisting of —H and lower alkyl
  • G is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —S—, and —CH 2 —;
  • T is selected from the group consisting of —CH 2 CH 2 O—, —CH 2 CH 2 NH—, and —CH 2 CH 2 S—;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 6 , and R 7 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , and cyano; with the proviso that at least one of R 1 and R 2 is not hydrogen;
  • R 8 and R 9 are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Cl, Br, I, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , (CH 2 )aryl, C(O)aryl, C(O)alkyl; or
  • R 1 and R 7 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 0 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 1 and R 7 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )aryl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 )heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted —CH(OH)heterocycloalkyl, —S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —S( ⁇ O) 2 N f R g , —C(O)NR f R g , and —C(O)R e ;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, F, Cl, Br, iodo, and CH 3 ;
  • Each R e is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl;
  • R f and R g are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ),heterocycloalkyl, or R f and R g may together form an optionally substituted heterocyclic ring, said heterocyclic ring may contain a second heterogroup within the ring selected from the group consisting of O, NR c , and S, wherein said optionally substituted heterocyclic ring may be substituted with 0-4 substituents selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —OR e , oxo, cyano, —CF 3 , optionally substituted phenyl, and —C(O)OR h ;
  • Each R h is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl; or
  • R 3 and R 1 are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 6 atoms with 2 unsaturations, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 1 —N—; or
  • R 8 and G are taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of formula —CH ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of —OH, —OCH 3 , —OC(O)R e , —OC(O)OR e , and —NHC(O)R e ; or
  • R 3 and R 5 are taken together along with the carbons they are attached to form an optionally substituted ring of 5 atoms with 1 unsaturation, not including the unsaturation on the ring to which R 3 and R 5 are attached, including 0 to 2 heteroatoms independently selected from —NR h —, —O—, and —S—, with the proviso that when there are 2 heteroatoms in the ring and both heteroatoms are different than nitrogen then both heteroatoms have to be separated by at least one carbon atom;
  • X is P(O)(YR 11 )Y′′
  • Y′′ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 3 -alkyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —CH 2 OH, —(CH 2 ) p S( ⁇ O) 2 NH 2 , —(CH 2 ) p C(O)NH 2 , —(CH 2 ) k C(O)OH, and —(CH 2 ) k C(O)OCH 3 ;
  • Y is selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR v —;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, —CH 2 —OC(O)R y , —CH(CH 3 )—OC(O)R y , —CH 2 —O—C(O)OR y , —CH(CH 3 )—O—C(O)OR y , and —(CH 2 ) 2 —S—C(O)R y ;
  • R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and —C(R x ) 2 C(O)OR y ;
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, heterocycloalkyl, and aralkyl;
  • X is P(O)(YR 11 )(Y′R 11 ) or P(O)(YR 11 )Y′′;
  • Y′′ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —CH 2 OH, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O)R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)NR f R g , and —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)R e ;
  • Y and Y′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR v —;
  • Y is —O— and Y′′ is hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —CH 2 OH, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR2)ncycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O)R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)NR f R g , —(CR a 2 ) k C(
  • Y is —NR v — and Y′′ is hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —CH 2 OH, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n aryl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O)R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)NR f R g , —(
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted CH 2 -heterocycloakyl wherein the cyclic moiety contains a carbonate or thiocarbonate, optionally substituted -alkylaryl, —C(R z ) 2 OC(O)NR z 2 , —NR z —C(O)—R y , —C(R z ) 2 —OC(O)R y , —C(R z ) 2 —O—C(O)OR y , —C(R z ) 2 OC(O)SR y , -alkyl-S—C(O)R y , -alkyl-S—S-alkylhydroxy, and -alkyl-S—S—S
  • R 11 and R 11 together form a cyclic group comprising -alkyl-S—S-alkyl-, or together R 11 and R 11 are the group:
  • V, W, and W′ are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aralkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted I-alkenyl, and optionally substituted I-alkynyl; or
  • V and Z are connected via an additional 3-5 atoms to form a cyclic group containing 5-7 atoms, wherein 0-1 atoms are heteroatoms and the remaining atoms are carbon, substituted with hydrogen, hydroxy, acyloxy, alkylthiocarbonyloxy, alkoxycarbonyloxy, or aryloxycarbonyloxy attached to a carbon atom that is three atoms from both Y groups attached to the phosphorus; or
  • V and Z are connected via an additional 3-5 atoms to form a cyclic group, wherein 0-1 atoms are heteroatoms and the remaining atoms are carbon or carbon substituted by hydrogen, that is fused to an aryl group at the beta and gamma position to the Y attached to the phosphorus; or
  • V and W are connected via an additional 3 carbon atoms to form an optionally substituted cyclic group containing 6 carbon atoms or carbon substituted by hydrogen and substituted with one substituent selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyloxy, alkoxycarbonyloxy, alkylthiocarbonyloxy, and aryloxycarbonyloxy, attached to one of said carbon atoms that is three atoms from a Y attached to the phosphorus; or
  • Z and W are connected via an additional 3-5 atoms to form a cyclic group, wherein 0-1 atoms are heteroatoms and the remaining atoms are carbon or carbon substituted by hydrogen, and V must be aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl; or
  • W and W′ are connected via an additional 2-5 atoms to form a cyclic group, wherein O 2 atoms are heteroatoms and the remaining atoms are carbon or carbon substituted by hydrogen, and V must be aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl;
  • Z is selected from the group consisting of —CHR z OH, —CHR z OC(O)R y , —CHR a OC(S)R y , —CHR z OC(S)OR y , —CHR z OC(O)SR y , —CHR Z OCO 2 R y , —OR z , —SR z , —CHR z N 3 , —CH 2 aryl, —CH(aryl)OH, —CH(CH ⁇ CR z 2 )OH, —CH(C ⁇ CR z )OH, —R z , —NR z 2 , —OCOR y , —OCO 2 R y , —SCOR y , —SCO 2 R y , —NHCOR z , —NHCO 2 R y , —CH 2 NHaryl, (CH 2 ) q —OR 2 ,
  • q is an integer 2 or 3;
  • Each R z is selected from the group consisting of R y and —H;
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, heterocycloalkyl, and aralkyl;
  • Each R x is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, and alkyl, or together R x and R x form a cycloalkyl group;
  • Each R V is selected from the group consisting of —H, lower alkyl, acyloxyalkyl, alkoxycarbonyloxyalkyl, and lower acyl;
  • V, Z, W, W′ are not all —H;
  • X is P(O)(YR 11 )(Y′R 11 ) or P(O)(YR 11 )Y′′;
  • Y′′ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —CH 2 OH, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O)R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)NR f R g , and —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)R e ;
  • Y and Y′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR v —;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, —C(R z ) 2 —OC(O)R y , —C(R z ) 2 —O—C(O)OR y , and -alkyl-S—C(O)R y ;
  • R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, —C(R z ) 2 —C(O)OR y , and —C(R x ) 2 C(O)OR y ;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, —C(R z ) 2 —OC(O)R y , —C(R z ) 2 —O—C(O)OR y , and -alkyl-S—C(O)R y ; and R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, —C(R z ) 2 —C(O)OR y , and —C(R x ) 2 C(O)OR y ;
  • R 11 and R 11 are the group:
  • V, W, and W′ are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl;
  • Each R z is selected from the group consisting of R y and —H;
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and aryl;
  • Each R x is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and alkyl
  • Each R V is selected from the group consisting of —H and lower alkyl
  • V, Z, W, W′ are not all —H;
  • X is P(O)(YR 11 )(Y′R 11 ) or P(O)(YR 11 )Y′′;
  • Y′′ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 6 -alkyl, —CF 3 , —CHF 2 , —CH 2 F, —CH 2 OH, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, optionally substituted —C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, optionally substituted —(CW2).cycloalkyl, optionally substituted —(CR a 2 ) n heterocycloalkyl, —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O)R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 R e , —(CR a 2 ) k S( ⁇ O) 2 NR f R g , —(CW2) k C(O)NR f R g , and —(CR a 2 ) k C(O)R e ;
  • Y and Y′ are each independently selected from the group consisting of —O—, and —NR v —;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, —CH 2 —OC(O)R y , —CH(CH 3 )—OC(O)R y , —CH 2 —O—C(O)OR y , —CH(CH 3 )—O—C(O)OR y , and —(CH 2 ) 2 —S—C(O)R y ;
  • R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and —C(R x ) 2 C(O)OR y ;
  • R 11 attached to —O— is independently selected from the group consisting of —H, alkyl, and optionally substituted aryl, and R 11 attached to —NR v — is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and —C(R x ) 2 C(O)OR y ;
  • R 11 and R 11 are the group:
  • V is aryl
  • W, W′ and Z are hydrogen
  • Each R y is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl, iso-propyl, ethyl, and methyl;
  • Each R x is independently selected from the group consisting of —H and —CH 3 ;
  • Each R v is —H
  • the compound of Formula I-IX is selected from the group consisting of:
  • the prodrugs are bis-POM, carbonate, bisamidate, or 4-aryl-2-oxo-2- ⁇ 5 -1,3,2-dioxaphosphonane prodrugs of the compounds or bis-POM, carbonate, or bisamidate prodrugs of the monoesters of the compounds.
  • the compound of Formula I-IX is selected from the group consisting of:
  • the compound of Formula I-IX is selected from the group consisting of:
  • the prodrugs of the above listed compounds are POM ester, carbonate, or amidate prodrugs.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be administered in combination with other pharmaceutical agents that are used to lower the fat content of liver or pharmaceutical agents that are used to treat or prevent disorders that are related to or result in an increase in the fat content of liver.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be administered in combination with other pharmaceutical agents that are used to lower serum cholesterol such as a cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitor or a cholesterol absorption inhibitor, especially a HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor, or a HMG-CoA synthase inhibitor, or a HMG-CoA reductase or synthase gene expression inhibitor, a cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) inhibitor (e.g., torcetrapib), a bile acid sequesterant (e.g., cholestyramine (Questran®), colesevelam and colestipol (Colestid®)), or a bile acid reabsorption inhibitor (see, for example, U.S. Pat. No.
  • a cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitor or a cholesterol absorption inhibitor especially a HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor, or a HMG-CoA synthase inhibitor, or a HMG-CoA reductase or synthase gene expression inhibitor,
  • a cholesterol absorption inhibitor as described (e.g., ezetimibe, tiqueside, pamaqueside or see, e.g., in WO 0250027), a PPARalpha agonist, a mixed PPAR alpha/gamma agonist such as, for example, AZ 242 (Tesaglitazar, (S)-3-(4-[2-(4-methanesulfony-loxyphenyl)ethoxy]phenyl)-2-ethoxypropionic acid), BMS 298585 N-[(4-methoxyphenoxy)carbonyl]-N-[[4-[2-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-4-oxazolyl)ethoxy]phenyl]methyl]glycine) or as described in WO 99/62872, WO 99
  • the HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor is from a class of therapeutics commonly called statins.
  • statins include but are not limited to lovastatin (MEVACOR; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,231,938; 4,294,926; 4,319,039), simvastatin (ZOCOR; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,444,784; 4,450,171, 4,820,850; 4,916,239), pravastatin (PRAVACHOL; see U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • Non-limiting examples of suitable bile acid sequestrants include cholestyramine (a styrene-divinylbenzene copolymer containing quaternary ammonium cationic groups capable of binding bile acids, such as QUESTRAN or QUESTRAN LIGHT cholestyramine which are available from Bristol-Myers Squibb), colestipol (a copolymer of diethylenetriamine and 1-chloro-2,3-epoxypropane, such as COLESTID tablets which are available from Pharmacia), colesevelam hydrochloride (such as WelChol Tablets (poly(allylamine hydrochloride) cross-linked with epichlorohydrin and alkylated with 1-bromodecane and (6-bromohexyl)-trimethylammonium bromide) which are available from Sankyo), water soluble derivatives such as 3,3-ioene, N-(cycloalkyl)alkylamines and poliglusam,
  • Suitable inorganic cholesterol sequestrants include bismuth salicylate plus montmorillonite clay, aluminum hydroxide and calcium carbonate antacids.
  • a fibrate base compound is a medicament for inhibiting synthesis and secretion of triglycerides in the liver and activating lipoprotein lipase, thereby lowering the triglyceride level in the blood.
  • examples include bezafibrate, beclobrate, binifibrate, ciprofibrate, clinofibrate, clofibrate, clofibric acid, ethofibrate, fenofibrate, gemfibrozil, nicofibrate, pirifibrate, ronifibrate, simfibrate and theofibrate.
  • Such an ACAT inhibitor includes, for example: a compound having the general formula (I) disclosed in WO 92/09561 [e.g., FR-129169, of which the chemical name is N-(1,2-diphenylethyl)-2-(2-octyloxyphenyl)acetamide]; a compound having the general formula (I) including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof disclosed in the Japanese Patent Publication Kohyo) Hei 8-510256 (WO 94/26702, U.S. Pat. No.
  • CI-1011 of which the chemical name is 2,6-diisopropylphenyl-N-[(2,4,6-triisopropylphenyl)acetyl]sulfamate, and in the present invention CI-1011 including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof ⁇ ; a compound having the general formula (I) including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof disclosed in EP 421441 (U.S. Pat. No.
  • F-1394 of which the chemical name is (1S,2S)-2-[3-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-3-nonylureido]cyclohexan-1-yl 3-[(4R)—N-(2,2,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3-dioxane-4-carbonyl)amino]propionate, and in the present invention F-1394 including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof ⁇ ; a compound including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof disclosed in the Japanese Patent Publication (Kohyo) 2000-500771 (WO 97/19918, U.S.
  • T-2591 of which the chemical name is 1-(3-t-butyl-2-hydroxy-5-methoxyphenyl)-3-(2-cyclohexylethyl)-3-(4-dimethylaminophenyl)urea, and in the present invention T-2591 including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereofl; a compound having the general formula (I) including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof disclosed in WO 96/26948 ⁇ e.g., FCE-28654, of which the chemical name is 1-(2,6-diisopropylphenyl)-3-[(4R,5R)-4,5-di-methyl-2-(4-phosphonophenyl)-1,3-dioxolan-2-ylmethyl]urea, including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or
  • N-(1-octyl-5-carboxymethyl-4,6-dimethylindolin-7-yl)-2,2-dimethylpropaneamide including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereofl.
  • the ACAT inhibitor preferably is a compound selected from the group consisting of FR-129169, CI-1011, F-1394, F-12511, T-2591, FCE-28654, K-10085, HL-004, NTE-122, FR-186054, N-(1-octyl-5-carboxymethyl-4,6-dimethylindolin-7-yl)-2,2-dimethylpropaneamide (hereinafter referred to as compound A), and N-(1-pentyl-4,6-dimethylindolin-7-yl)-2,2-dimethylpropaneamide (hereinafter referred as compound B), including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof.
  • the ACAT inhibitor more preferably is a compound selected from the group consisting of CI-1011, F-12511, N-(1-octyl-5-carboxymethyl-4,6-dimethylindolin-7-yl)-2,2-dimethylpropancamide (compound A), and N-(1-pentyl-4,6-dimethylindolin-7-yl)-2,2-dimethylpropaneamide (compound B), including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof; most preferred is N-(1-octyl-5-carboxymethyl-4,6-dimethylindolin-7-yl)-2,2-dimethylpropaneamide (compound A).
  • An angiotensin II receptor antagonist includes, for example, a biphenyl tetrazole compound or biphenylcarboxylic acid derivative such as: a compound having the general formula (I) including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof disclosed in the Japanese Patent Publication (Kokai) Sho 63-23868 (U.S. Pat. No.
  • losartan of which the chemical name is 2-butyl-4-chloro-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-1H-imidazol-5-methanol, and in the present invention losartan including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof ⁇ ; a compound having the general formula (I) including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof disclosed in the Japanese Patent Publication (Kohyo) Hei 4-506222 (WO 91/14679) ⁇ e.g., irbesartan, of which the chemical name is 2-N-butyl-4-spirocyclopentane-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]-2-imidazoline-5-one, and in the present invention irbe
  • olmesartan of which the chemical name is (5-methyl-2-oxo-1,3-dioxolen-4-yl)methyl 4-(1-hydroxy-1-methylethyl)-2-propyl-1-[2′-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-4-ylmethyl]imidazole-5-carboxylate
  • olmesartan includes carboxylic acid derivatives thereof, pharmacologically acceptable esters of the carboxylic acid derivatives (CS-866 or the like), including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof ⁇ ; and a compound having the general formula (I), including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof disclosed in the Japanese Patent Publication (Kokai) Hei 4-346978 (U.S.
  • telmisartan of which the chemical name is 4′-[[2-n-propyl-4-methyl-6-(1-methylbenzimidazol-2-yl)-benzimidazol-1-yl]methyl]biphenyl-2-carboxylate, including a pharmacologically acceptable salt/co-crystal, ester or prodrug thereof ⁇ .
  • the angiotensin II receptor antagonist preferably is losartan, irbesartan, valsartan, candesartan, olmesartan, or telmisartan; more preferred is losartan or olmesartan; and most preferred is olmesartan.
  • combination therapy with compounds of this invention maybe useful in reducing the dosage of the second drug or agent (e.g., atorvastatin).
  • the second drug or agent e.g., atorvastatin
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used in combination with an apolipoprotein B secretion inhibitor and/or microsomal triglyceride transfer protein (MTP) inhibitor.
  • MTP microsomal triglyceride transfer protein
  • HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor refers to a compound that inhibits the biotransformation of hydroxymethylglutaryl-coenzyme A to mevalonic acid as catalyzed by the enzyme HMG-CoA reductase. Such inhibition may be determined readily by one of skill in the art according to standard assays (e.g., Meth. Enzymology 71:455-509 (1981); and the references cited therein). A variety of these compounds are described and referenced below. U.S. Pat. No.
  • 4,231,938 discloses certain compounds isolated after cultivation of a microorganism belonging to the genus Aspergillus , such as lovastatin.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,444,784 discloses synthetic derivatives of the aforementioned compounds, such as simvastatin.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,739,073 discloses certain substituted indoles, such as fluvastatin.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,346,227 discloses ML-236B derivatives, such as pravastatin.
  • EP 491,226 teaches certain pyridyldihydroxyheptenoic acids, such as rivastatin.
  • 4,647,576 discloses certain 6-[2-(substituted-pyrrol-1-yl)-alkyl]-pyran-2-ones such as atorvastatin.
  • Other HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors will be known to those skilled in the art. Examples of currently or previously marketed products containing HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors include cerivastatin Na, rosuvastatin Ca, fluvastatin, atorvastatin, lovastatin, pravastatin Na and simvastatin.
  • HMG-CoA synthase inhibitor refers to a compound that inhibits the biosynthesis of hydroxymethylglutaryl-coenzyme A from acetyl-coenzyme A and acetoacetyl-coenzyme A, catalyzed by the enzyme HMG-CoA synthase. Such inhibition may be determined readily by one of skill in the art according to standard assays (e.g., Meth. Enzymology 35:155-160 (1975); and Meth. Enzymology, 110:19-26 (1985); and the references cited therein). A variety of these compounds are described and referenced below. U.S. Pat.
  • No. 5,120,729 discloses certain beta-lactam derivatives.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,064,856 discloses certain spiro-lactone derivatives prepared by culturing the microorganism MF5253.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 4,847,271 discloses certain oxetane compounds such as 11-(3-hydroxymethyl-4-oxo-2-oxetayl)-3,5,7-trimethyl-2,4-undecadienoic acid derivatives.
  • Other HMG-CoA synthase inhibitors useful in the methods, compositions and kits of the present invention will be known to those skilled in the art.
  • Any compound that decreases HMG-CoA reductase gene expression may be used as an additional compound in the combination therapy aspect of this invention.
  • These agents may be HMG-CoA reductase transcription inhibitors that block the transcription of DNA or translation inhibitors that prevent translation of mRNA coding for HMG-CoA reductase into protein.
  • Such inhibitors may either affect transcription or translation directly, or may be biotransformed into compounds that have the aforementioned attributes by one or more enzymes in the cholesterol biosynthetic cascade or may lead to the accumulation of an isoprene metabolite that has the aforementioned activities.
  • Such regulation is readily determined by those skilled in the art according to standard assays ( Meth. Enzymology 110: 9-19 (1985)).
  • Any compound having activity as a CETP inhibitor can serve as the second compound in the combination therapy aspect of the instant invention.
  • CETP inhibitor refers to compounds that inhibit the cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) mediated transport of various cholesteryl esters and triglycerides from HDL to LDL and VLDL. A variety of these compounds are described and referenced below; however, other CETP inhibitors will be known to those skilled in the art.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,512,548 discloses certain polypeptide derivatives having activity as CETP inhibitors, while certain CETP-inhibitory rosenonolactone derivatives and phosphate-containing analogs of cholesteryl ester are disclosed in J. Antibiot. 49(8):815-816 (1996), and Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 6:1951-1954 (1996), respectively.
  • ACAT inhibitor refers to a compound that inhibits the intracellular esteriflcation of dietary cholesterol by the enzyme acyl CoA: cholesterol acyltransferase. Such inhibition may be determined readily by one of skill in the art according to standard assays, such as the method of Heider et al. described in J. Lipid Res., 24:1127 (1983). A variety of these compounds are described and referenced below; however, other ACAT inhibitors will be known to those skilled in the art.
  • U.S. Pat. No. 5,510,379 discloses certain carboxysulfonates, while WO 96/26948 and WO 96/10559 both disclose urea derivatives having ACAT inhibitory activity.
  • squalene synthetase inhibitor refers to compounds that inhibit the condensation of two molecules of farnesylpyrophosphate to form squalene, a reaction that is catalyzed by the enzyme squalene synthetase. Such inhibition is readily determined by those skilled in the art according to standard methodology ( Meth. Enzymology 15:393-454 (1969); and Meth. Enzymology, 110:359-373 (1985); and references cited therein). A summary of squalene synthetase inhibitors has been complied in Curr. Op. Ylter.
  • EP 0 567 026 A1 discloses certain 4,1-benzoxazepine derivatives as squalene synthetase inhibitors and their use in the treatment of hypercholesterolemia and as fungicides.
  • EP 0 645 378 A1 discloses certain seven- or eight-membered heterocycles as squalene synthetase inhibitors and their use in the treatment and prevention hypercholesterolemia and fulngal infections.
  • EP 0 645 377 A1 discloses certain benzoxazepine derivatives as squalene synthetase inhibitors useful for the treatment of hypercholesterolemia or coronary sclerosis.
  • EP 0 611 749 A1 discloses certain substituted amic acid derivatives useful for the treatment of arteriosclerosis.
  • EP 0 705 607 A2 discloses certain condensed seven- or eight-membered heterocyclic compounds useful as antihypertriglycerideniic agents.
  • WO 96/09827 discloses certain combinations of cholesterol absorption inhibitors and cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitors including benzoxazepine derivatives and benzothiazepine derivatives.
  • EP 0 701 725 A1 discloses a process for preparing certain optically-active compounds, including benzoxazepine derivatives, having plasma cholesterol and triglyceride lowering activities.
  • bile acid sequestrants such as colestipol HCl and cholestyramine
  • fibric acid derivatives such as clofibrate, fenofibrate, and gemfibrozil.
  • the compounds of the present invention be administered with a lipase inhibitor and/or a glucosidase inhibitor, which are typically used in the treatment of conditions resulting from the presence of excess triglycerides, free fatty acids, cholesterol, cholesterol esters or glucose including, inter alia, obesity, hyperlipidemia, hyperlipoproteinemia, Syndrome X, and the like.
  • any lipase inhibitor or glucosidase inhibitor may be employed.
  • lipase inhibitors comprise gastric or pancreatic lipase inhibitors.
  • glucosidase inhibitors comprise amylase inhibitors.
  • glucosidase inhibitors are those inhibitors selected from the group consisting of acarbose, adiposine, voglibose, miglitol, emiglitate, camiglibose, tendamistate, trestatin, pradimicin-Q and salbostatin.
  • amylase inhibitors include tendamistat and the various cyclic peptides related thereto disclosed in U.S.
  • a lipase inhibitor is a compound that inhibits the metabolic cleavage of dietary triglycerides into free fatty acids and monoglycerides.
  • lipolysis occurs via a two-step process that involves acylation of an activated serine moiety of the lipase enzyme. This leads to the production of a fatty acid-lipase hemiacetal intermediate, which is then cleaved to release a diglyceride. Following further deacylation, the lipase-fatty acid intermediate is cleaved, resulting in free lipase, a monoglyceride and a fatty acid.
  • bile acid phospholipid micelles which are subsequently absorbed at the level of the brush border of the small intestine.
  • the micelles eventually enter the peripheral circulation as chylomicrons. Accordingly, compounds, including lipase inhibitors that selectively limit or inhibit the absorption of ingested fat precursors are useful in the treatment of conditions including obesity, hyperlipidemia, hyperlipoproteinemia, Syndrome X, and the like.
  • Pancreatic lipase mediates the metabolic cleavage of fatty acids from triglycerides at the 1- and 3-carbon positions.
  • the primary site of the metabolism of ingested fats is in the duodenum and proximal jejunum by pancreatic lipase, which is usually secreted in vast excess of the amounts necessary for the breakdown of fats in the upper small intestine.
  • pancreatic lipase is the primary enzyme required for the absorption of dietary triglycerides, inhibitors have utility in the treatment of obesity and the other related conditions.
  • Gastric lipase is an immunologically distinct lipase that is responsible for approximately 10 to 40% of the digestion of dietary fats. Gastric lipase is secreted in response to mechanical stimulation, ingestion of food, the presence of a fatty meal or by sympathetic agents. Gastric lipolysis of ingested fats is of physiological importance in the provision of fatty acids needed to trigger pancreatic lipase activity in the intestine and is also of importance for fat absorption in a variety of physiological and pathological conditions associated with pancreatic insufficiency. See, for example, Abrams et al., Gastroenterology 92:125 (1987).
  • lipase inhibitors are known to one of ordinary skill in the art. However, in the practice of the methods, pharmaceutical compositions, and kits of the instant invention, generally lipase inhibitors are those inhibitors that are selected from the group consisting of lipstatin, tetrahydrolipstatin (orlistat), FL-386, WAY-121898, Bay-N-3176, valilactone, esterastin, ebelactone A, ebelactone B and RHC 80267.
  • pancreatic lipase inhibitor FL-386 1-[4-(2-methylpropyl)cyclohexyl]-2-[(phenylsulfonyl)oxy]-ethanone, and the variously substituted sulfonate derivatives related thereto, are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,452,813.
  • pancreatic lipase inhibitor WAY-121898 4-phenoxyphenyl-4-methylpiperidin-1-yl-carboxylate, and the various carbamate esters and pharmaceutically acceptable salts related thereto, are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,512,565; 5,391,571 and 5,602,151.
  • pancreatic lipase inhibitor valilactone and a process for the preparation thereof by the microbial cultivation of Aetinomycetes strain MG147-CF2, are disclosed in Kitahara, et al., J. Antibiotics 40(11):1647-50 (1987).
  • pancreatic lipase inhibitors ebelactone A and ebelactone B and a process for the preparation thereof by the microbial cultivation of Actinomycetes strain MG7-G1, are disclosed in Umezawa et al., J. Antibiotics 33:1594-1596 (1980).
  • the use of ebelactones A and B in the suppression of monoglyceride formation is disclosed in Japanese Kokai 08-143457, published Jun. 4, 1996.
  • the lipase inhibitor RHC 80267, cyclo-O,O′-[(1,6-hexanediyl)-bis-(iminocarbonyl)]dioxime, and the various bis(iminocarbonyl)dioximes related thereto may be prepared as described in Petersen et al., Liebig's Annalen, 562:205-29 (1949).
  • RHC 80267 to inhibit the activity of myocardial lipoprotein lipase is disclosed in Carroll et al., Lipids 27:305-7 (1992) and Chuang et al., J. Mol. Cell. Cardiol. 22:1009-16 (1990).
  • the compounds of Formula I can be used in combination with an additional anti-obesity agent.
  • the additional anti-obesity agent in one aspect is selected from the group consisting of a ⁇ 3 -adrenergic receptor agonist, a cholecystokinin-A agonist, a monoamine reuptake inhibitor, a synipathomimetic agent, a serotoninergic agent, a dopamine agonist, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor agonist or mimetic, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor analog, a cannabinoid receptor antagonist, a melanin concentrating hormone antagonist, leptin, a leptin analog, a leptin receptor agonist, a galanin antagonist, a lipase inhibitor, a bombesin agonist, a neuropeptide-Y antagonist, a thyromimetic agent, dehydroepiandrosterone or an analog thereof, a glucocor
  • the anti-obesity agents comprise those compounds selected from the group consisting of sibutramine, fenfluramine, dexfenfluramine, bromocriptine, phentermine, ephedrine, leptin, phenylpropanolamine pseudoephedrine, ⁇ 4-[2-(2-[6-aminopyridin-3-yl]2(R)-hydroxyethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl ⁇ acetic acid, ⁇ 4 ⁇ 2-(2-[6-aminopyridin-3-yl]-2(R)-hydroxyethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl ⁇ benzoic acid, ⁇ 4-[2-(2 ⁇ 6-aminopyridin-3-yl]-2(R)-hydroxyethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl ⁇ propionic acid, and ⁇ 4-[2-(2-[6-aminopyridin-3-yl]-2(R)-hydroxyethylamin
  • the thyromimetic compounds present may be administered in combination with pharmaceutical agents useful for the prevention or treatment of diabetes, including impaired glucose tolerance, insulin resistance, insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (Type I) and non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM or Type II). Also included in the prevention or treatment of diabetes are the diabetic complications, such as neuropathy, nephropathy, retinopathy or cataracts.
  • the type of diabetes to be treated is non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, also known as Type II diabetes or NIDDM.
  • agents that can be used to treat diabetes include insulin and insulin analogs (e.g., LysPro insulin); GLP-1 (7-37) (insulinotropin) and GLP-1 (7-36) —NH 2 .
  • Agents that enhance insulin secretion e.g., eblorpropamide, glibenclamide, tolbutamide, tolazamide, acetohexamide, glypizide, glimepiride, repaglinide, nateglinide, meglitinide; biguanides: metformin, phenformin, buformin;
  • A2-antagonists and imidazolines midaglizole, isaglidole, deriglidole, idazoxan, efaroxan, fluparoxan; other insulin secretagogues linogliride, A-4166; glitazones: ciglitazone, pioglitazone, englitazone, troglitazone, dargli
  • the compounds of the present invention can be used in combination with one or more aldose reductase inhibitors, DPPIV inhibitor, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors, sorbitol dehydrogenase inhibitors, NHE-1 inhibitors and/or glucocorticoid receptor antagonists.
  • FBPase fructose-1,6-bisphosphatase
  • Gluconeogenesis the metabolic pathway by which the liver synthesizes glucose from 3-carbon precursors.
  • FBPase inhibitor refers to compounds that inhibit FBPase enzyme activity and thereby block the conversion of fructose-1,6-bisphosphate, the substrate of the enzyme, to fructose 6-phosphate. FBPase inhibition can be determined directly at the enzyme level by those skilled in the art according to standard methodology (e.g., Gidh-Jain et al., J. Biol. Chem. 269(44):27732-8 (1994)).
  • FBPase inhibition can be assessed according to standard methodology by measuring the inhibition of glucose production by isolated hepatocytes or in a perfused liver, or by measuring blood glucose lowering in normal or diabetic animals (e.g., Vincent et al., Diabetologia 39(10):1148-55 (1996); Vincent et al., Diabetes 40(10):1259-66 (1991)).
  • in vivo metabolic activation of a compound may be required to generate the FBPase inhibitor.
  • This class of compounds may be inactive in the enzyme inhibition screen, may or may not be active in hepatocytes, but is active in vivo as evidenced by glucose lowering in the normal, fasted rat and/or in animal models of diabetes.
  • FBPase inhibitors A variety of FBPase inhibitors are described and referenced below; however, other FBPase inhibitors will be known to those skilled in the art.
  • Gruber et al. U.S. Pat. No. 5,658,889 described the use of inhibitors of the AMP site of FBPase to treat diabetes;
  • WO 98/39344 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,284,748 describe purine inhibitors;
  • WO 98/39343 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,110,903 describe benzothiazole inhibitors to treat diabetes;
  • WO 98/39342 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,054,587 describe indole inhibitors to treat diabetes; and WO 00/14095 and U.S. Pat. No.
  • 6,489,476 describe heteroaromatic phosphonate inhibitors to treat diabetes.
  • Other FBPase inhibitors are described in Wright et al., J. Med. Chem. 45(18):3865-77 (2002) and WO 99/47549.
  • the thyromimetic compounds can also be used in combination with sulfonylureas such as amaryl, alyburide, glucotrol, chlorpropamide, diabinese, tolazamide, tolinase, acetohexamide, glipizide, tolbutamide, orinase, glimepiride, DiaBeta, micronase, glibenclamide, and gliclazide.
  • sulfonylureas such as amaryl, alyburide, glucotrol, chlorpropamide, diabinese, tolazamide, tolinase, acetohexamide, glipizide, tolbutamide, orinase, glimepiride, DiaBeta, micronase, glibenclamide, and gliclazide.
  • the thyromimetic compounds can also be used in combination with antihypertensive agents. Any anti-hypertensive agent can be used as the second agent in such combinations.
  • antihypertensive agents include calcium channel blockers, such as Cardizem, Adalat, Calan, Cardene, Covera, Dilacor, DynaCirc, Procardia XL, Sular, Tiazac, Vascor, Verelan, Isoptin, Nimotop, Norvase, and Plendil; angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors, such as Accupril, Altace, Captopril, Lotensin, Mavik, Monopril, Prinivil, Univasc, Vasotec and Zestril.
  • ACE angiotensin converting enzyme
  • Examples of compounds that may be used in combination with the compounds of the present invention to prevent or treat osteoporosis include: anti-resorptive agents including progestins, polyphosphonates, bisphosphonate(s), estrogen agonists/antagonists, estrogen, estrogen/progestin combinations, Premarin, estrone, estriol or 17 ⁇ - or 17 ⁇ -ethynyl estradiol); progestins including algestone acetophenide, altrenogest, amadinone acetate, anagestone acetate, chlormadinone acetate, cingestol, clogestone acetate, clomegestone acetate, delmadinone acetate, desogestrel, dimethisterone, dydrogesterone, ethynerone, ethynodiol diacetate, etonogestrel, fluorogestone acetate, gestaclone, gestodene, gestonorone ca
  • polyphosphonates examples include geminal diphosphonates (also referred to as bis-phosphonates), tiludronate disodium, ibandronic acid, alendronate, resindronate zoledronic acid, 6-amino-1-hydroxy-hexylidene-bisphosphonic acid and 1-hydroxy-3(methylpentylamino)-propylidene-bisphosphonic acid. Salts, co-crystals and esters of the polyphosphonates are likewise included.
  • Specific examples include ethane-1-hydroxy 1,1-diphosphonic acid, methane diphosphonic acid, pentane-1-hydroxy-1,1-diphosphonic acid, methane dichloro diphosphonic acid, methane hydroxy diphosphonic acid, ethane-1-amino-1,1-diphosphonic acid, ethane-2-amino-1,1-diphosphonic acid, propane-3-amino-1-hydroxy-1,1-diphosphonic acid, propane-N,N-dimethyl-3-amino-t-hydroxy-1,1-diphosphonic acid, propane-3,3-dimethyl-3-amino-1-hydroxy-1,1-diphosphonic acid, phenyl amino methane diphosphonic acid, N,N-dimethylamino methane diphosphonic acid, N(2-hydroxyethyl)amino methane diphosphonic acid, butane-4-amino-1-hydroxy-1,1-diphosphonic acid, pentane-5-
  • Estrogen agonist/antagonist include 3-(4-(1,2-diphenyl-but-1-enyl)-phenyl)-acrylic acid, tamoxifen: (ethanamine, 2-( ⁇ 4-(1,2-diphenyl-1-butenyl)phenoxy)-N,N-dimethyl,(Z)-2-,2-hydroxy-1,2,3-propanetricarboxylate(1:1)) and related compounds which are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,536,516, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, 4-hydroxy tamoxifen, which is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • raloxifene (methanone, (6-hydroxy-2-(4-hydroxyphenyl)benzo[b]thien-3-yl)(4-(2-(1-piperidinyl)ethoxy)phenyl)-hydrochloride) which is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,418,068, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, toremifene: (ethanamine, 2-(4-(4-chloro-1,2-diphenyl-1-butenyl)phenoxy)-N,N-dimethyl,(Z)-,2-hydroxy-1,2,3-propanetricarboxylate (1:1) which is disclosed in U.S. Pat.
  • centchroman 1-(2-((4-(-methoxy-2,2, dimethyl-3-phenyl-chroman-4-yl)-phenoxy)-ethyl)-pyrrolidine, which is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,822,287, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, levorneloxifene, idoxifene: (E)-1-(2-(4-(1-(4-iodo-phenyl)-2-phenyl-but-1-enyl)-phenoxy)-ethyl)-pyrrolidinone, which is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • WO 95/10513 assigned to Pfizer Inc, TSE-424 (Wyeth-Ayerst Laboratories) and arazoxifene, cis-6-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-5-(4-(2-piperidin-1-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl)-5,6,-7,8-tetrahydro-naphthalene-2-ol; ( ⁇ )-cis-6-phenyl-5-(4-(2-pyrrolidin-1-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-naphthalene-2-ol (also known as lasofoxifene); cis-6-phenyl-5-(4-(2-pyrrolidin-1-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-naphthalene-2-ol; cis-1-(6′-pyrrolodinoethoxy-3′-pyridyl
  • anti-osteoporosis agents which can be used as the second agent in combination with a compound of the present invention, include, for example, the following: parathyroid hormone (PTH) (a bone anabolic agent); parathyroid hormone PTH) secretagogues (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,132,774), particularly calcium receptor antagonists; calcitonin; and vitamin D and vitamin D analogs.
  • PTH parathyroid hormone
  • PTH parathyroid hormone secretagogues
  • SARMs include compounds such as cyproterone acetate, chlormadinone, flutamide, hydroxyflutamide, bicalutamide, nilutamide, spironolactone, 4-(trifluoromethyl)-2(1H)-pyrrolidino[3,2-g]quinoline derivatives, 1,2-dihydropyridino[5,6-g]quinoline derivatives and piperidino[3,2-g]quinolinone derivatives.
  • cypterone also known as (1b,2b)-6-chloro-1,2-dihydro-17-hydroxy-3′-H-cyclopropa[1,2]pregna-1,4,6-triene-3,20-dione is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,234,093.
  • Chlormadinone also known as 17-(acetyloxy)-6-chloropregna-4,6-diene-3,20-dione, in its acetate form, acts as an anti-androgen and is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,485,852.
  • Nilutamide also known as 5,5-dimethyl-3-[4-nito-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-2,4-imidazolidinedione and by the trade name Nilandron® is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,097,578.
  • Flutamide also known as 2-methyl-N-[4-nitro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]propanamide and the trade name Eulexin® is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,847,988.
  • Bicalutamide also known as 4′-cyano-a′,a′,a′-trifluoro-3-(4-fluorophenylsulfonyl)-2-hydroxy-2-methylpropiono-m-toluidide and the trade name Casodex® is disclosed in EP-100172.
  • the enantiomers of biclutamide are discussed by Tucker et al., J. Med. Chem. 31:885-887 (1988). Hydroxyflutamide, a known androgen receptor antagonist in most tissues, has been suggested to function as a SARM for effects on IL-6 production by osteoblasts as disclosed in Hofbauer et al., J. Bone Miner. Res. 14:1330-1337 (1999).
  • Unit dose amounts and dose scheduling for the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be determined using methods well known in the art.
  • the compounds of the invention are administered orally in a total daily dose of about 0.375 ⁇ g/kg/day to about 3.75 mg/kg/day.
  • the total daily dose is from about 3.75 ⁇ g/kg/day to about 0.375 mg/kg/day.
  • the total daily dose is from about 3.75 ⁇ g/kg/day to about 37.5 ⁇ g/kg/day.
  • the total daily dose is from about 3.75 ⁇ g/kg/day to about 60 ⁇ g/kg/day.
  • the dose range is from 30 ⁇ g/kg/day to 3.0 mg/kg/day.
  • the compounds of the invention are administered orally in a unit dose of about 0.375 ⁇ g/kg to about 3.75 mg/kg. In another aspect the unit dose is from about 3.75 ⁇ g/kg to about 0.375 mg/kg. In another aspect the unit dose is from about 3.75 ⁇ g/kg to about 37.5 ⁇ g/kg. In another aspect the unit dose is from about 3.75 ⁇ g/kg to about 60 ⁇ g/kg. In one aspect, the compounds of the invention are administered orally in a unit dose of about 0.188 ⁇ g/kg to about 1.88 mg/kg. In another aspect the unit dose is from about 1.88 ⁇ g/kg to about 0.188 mg/kg.
  • the unit dose is from about 1.88 ⁇ g/kg to about 18.8 ⁇ g/kg. In another aspect the unit dose is from about 1.88 ⁇ g/kg to about 30 ⁇ g/kg. In one aspect, the compounds of the invention are administered orally in a unit dose of about 0.125 ⁇ g/kg to about 1.25 mg/kg. In another aspect the unit dose is from about 1.25 ⁇ g/kg to about 0.125 mg/kg. In another aspect the unit dose is from about 1.25 ⁇ g/kg to about 12.5 ⁇ g/kg. In another aspect the unit dose is from about 1.25 ⁇ g/kg to about 20 ⁇ g/kg. In one embodiment the unit dose is administered once a day. In another embodiment the unit dose is administered twice a day. In another embodiment the unit dose is administered three times a day. In another embodiment the unit dose is administered four times a day.
  • Dose refers to the equivalent of the free acid.
  • the use of controlled-release preparations to control the rate of release of the active ingredient may be preferred.
  • the daily dose may be administered in multiple divided doses over the period of a day. Doses and dosing schedules may be adjusted to the form of the drug or form of delivery used. For example, different dosages and scheduling of doses may be used when the form of the drug is in a controlled release form or intravenous delivery is used with a liquid form.
  • Compounds of this invention when used in combination with other compounds or agents may be administered as a daily dose or an appropriate fraction of the daily dose (e.g., bid). Administration of compounds of this invention may occur at or near the time in which the other compound or agent is administered or at a different time.
  • the other compound or agent e.g., atorvastatin
  • the compounds may be administered by a variety of means including orally, parenterally, by inhalation including but not limited to nasal spray, topically, implantables or rectally in formulations containing pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants and vehicles.
  • parenteral as used here includes subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intra-arterial injections with a variety of infusion techniques.
  • Intra-arterial and intravenous injection as used herein includes administration through catheters. Oral administration is generally preferred.
  • compositions containing the active ingredient may be in any form suitable for the intended method of administration.
  • tablets, pellets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oil suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsions, hard or soft capsules, syrups or elixirs may be prepared.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may be prepared according to any method known to the art for the manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions and such compositions may contain one or more agents including sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and preserving agents, in order to provide a palatable preparation.
  • Tablets and pellets containing the active ingredient in admixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipient which are suitable for manufacture of tablets are acceptable.
  • excipients may be, for example, inert diluents, such as calcium or sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium or sodium phosphate; granulating and disintegrating agents, such as maize starch, or alginic acid; binding agents, such as starch, gelatin or acacia; and lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc.
  • Tablets and pellets may be uncoated or may be coated by known techniques including microencapsulation to delay disintegration and adsorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period.
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate alone or with a wax may be employed.
  • Formulations for oral use may be also presented as hard gelatin capsules where the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent, for example calcium phosphate or kaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • an inert solid diluent for example calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium such as peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • Aqueous suspensions of the invention contain the active materials in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions.
  • excipients include a suspending agent, such as sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia, and dispersing or wetting agents such as a naturally occurring phosphatide (e.g., lecithin), a condensation product of an alkylene oxide with a fatty acid (e.g., polyoxyethylene stearate), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a long chain aliphatic alcohol (e.g., heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol), a condensation product of ethylene oxide with a partial ester derived from a fatty acid and a hexitol anhydride (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate).
  • a suspending agent such as sodium carb
  • the aqueous suspension may also contain one or more preservatives such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxy-benzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oil suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient in a vegetable oil, such as arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil, or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oral suspensions may contain a thickening agent, such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol.
  • Sweetening agents, such as those set forth above, and flavoring agents may be added to provide a palatable oral preparation.
  • These compositions may be preserved by the addition of an antioxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders, pellets, and granules of the invention suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent, and one or more preservatives.
  • a dispersing or wetting agent e.g., sodium EDTA
  • suspending agent e.g., sodium EDTA
  • preservatives e.g., sodium bicarbonate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium bicarbonate
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may also be in the form of oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil, such as olive oil or arachis oil, a mineral oil, such as liquid paraffin, or a mixture of these.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums, such as gum acacia and gum tragacanth, naturally occurring phosphatides, such as soybean lecithin, esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides, such as sorbitan monooleate, and condensation products of these partial esters with ethylene oxide, such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.
  • the emulsion may also contain sweetening and flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also contain a demulcent, a preservative, a flavoring or a coloring agent.
  • sweetening agents such as glycerol, sorbitol or sucrose.
  • Such formulations may also contain a demulcent, a preservative, a flavoring or a coloring agent.
  • compositions may be in the form of a sterile injectable preparation, such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • a sterile injectable preparation such as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • This suspension may be formulated according to the known art using those suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents which have been mentioned above.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, such as a solution in 1,3-butane-diol or prepared as a lyophilized powder.
  • the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile fixed oils may conventionally be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid may
  • a time-release formulation intended for oral administration to humans may contain 0.2 to 2000 ⁇ mol (approximately 0.1 to 1000 mg) of active material compounded with an appropriate and convenient amount of carrier material which may vary from about 5 to about 99.9% of the total compositions. It is preferred that the pharmaceutical composition be prepared which provides easily measurable amounts for administration.
  • an aqueous solution intended for intravenous infusion should contain from about 0.05 to about 500 umol (approximately 0.025 to 250 mg) of the active ingredient per milliliter of solution in order that infusion of a suitable volume at a rate of about 30 mL/h can occur.
  • formulations suitable for oral administration may be presented as discrete units such as capsules, cachets, pellets, or tablets each containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient; as a powder or granules; as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid; or as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion.
  • the active ingredient may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
  • a tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Compressed tablets may be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredient in a free flowing form such as a powder or granules, optionally mixed with a binder (e.g., povidone, gelatin, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (e.g., sodium starch glycolate, cross-linked povidone, cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose) surface active or dispersing agent.
  • Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent. Tablets may optionally be provided with an enteric coating, to provide release in parts of the gut other than the stomach. This is particularly advantageous with the compounds of the present invention when such compounds are susceptible to acid hydrolysis.
  • compositions comprising the compounds of the present invention can be administered by controlled- or delayed-release means.
  • Controlled-release pharmaceutical products have a common goal of improving drug therapy over that achieved by their non-controlled release counterparts.
  • the use of an optimally designed controlled-release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to treat or control the condition in a minimum amount of time.
  • Controlled Release Dosage Form Design 2 Technomic Publishing, Lancaster, Pa.: 2000.
  • Conventional dosage forms generally provide rapid or immediate drug release from the formulation. Depending on the pharmacology and pharmacokinetics of the drug, use of conventional dosage forms can lead to wide fluctuations in the concentrations of the drug in a patient's blood and other tissues. These fluctuations can impact a number of parameters, such as dose frequency, onset of action, duration of efficacy, maintenance of therapeutic blood levels, toxicity, side effects, and the like.
  • controlled-release formulations can be used to control a drug's onset of action, duration of action, plasma levels within the therapeutic window, and peak blood levels.
  • controlled- or extended-release dosage forms or formulations can be used to ensure that the maximum effectiveness of a drug is achieved while minimizing potential adverse effects and safety concerns, which can occur both from under dosing a drug (i.e., going below the minimum therapeutic levels) as well as exceeding the toxicity level for the drug.
  • Controlled-release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug (active ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and continually release other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain this constant level of drug in the body, the drug must be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of drug being metabolized and excreted from the body.
  • Controlled-release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, ionic strength, osmotic pressure, temperature, enzymes, water, and other physiological conditions or compounds.
  • compositions of the invention can be adapted for use with the compositions of the invention.
  • Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; 4,008,719; 5,674,533; 5,059,595; 5,591,767; 5,120,548; 5,073,543; 5,639,476; 5,354,556; 5,733,566; and 6,365,185 B1; each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • dosage forms can be used to provide slow or controlled-release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems (such as OROS® (Alza Corporation, Mountain View, Calif. USA)), multilayer coatings, microparticles, liposomes, or microspheres or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions.
  • ion exchange materials can be used to prepare immobilized forms of compositions of the invention and thus effect controlled delivery of the drug. Examples of specific anion exchangers include, but are not limited to, DUOLITE A568 and DUOLITE AP143 (Rohm & Haas, Spring House, Pa. USA).
  • One embodiment of the invention encompasses a unit dosage form which comprises a compound of the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or a polymorph, solvate, hydrate, dehydrate, co-crystal, anhydrous, or amorphous form thereof, and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or diluents, wherein the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is formulated for controlled-release.
  • Specific dosage forms utilize an osmotic drug delivery system.
  • OROS osmotic drug delivery system
  • This technology can readily be adapted for the delivery of compounds and compositions of the invention.
  • Various aspects of the technology are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,375,978 B1; 6,368,626 B1; 6,342,249 B1; 6,333,050 B2; 6,287,295 B1; 6,283,953 B1; 6,270,787 B1; 6,245,357 B1; and 6,132,420; each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Additional OROS systems that can be used for the controlled oral delivery of compounds and compositions of the invention include OROS-CT and L-OROS. Id.; see also, Delivery Times, vol. 1, issue II (Alza Corporation).
  • OROS oral dosage forms are made by compressing a drug powder (e.g., a T3 mimetic composition of the present invention) into a hard tablet, coating the tablet with cellulose derivatives to form a semi-permeable membrane, and then drilling an orifice in the coating (e.g., with a laser).
  • a drug powder e.g., a T3 mimetic composition of the present invention
  • the advantage of such dosage forms is that the delivery rate of the drug is not influenced by physiological or experimental conditions. Even a drug with a pH-dependent solubility can be delivered at a constant rate regardless of the pH of the delivery medium. But because these advantages are provided by a build-up of osmotic pressure within the dosage form after administration, conventional OROS drug delivery systems cannot be used to effectively deliver drugs with low water solubility.
  • a specific dosage form of the invention comprises: a wall defining a cavity, the wall having an exit orifice formed or formable therein and at least a portion of the wall being semipermeable; an expandable layer located within the cavity remote from the exit orifice and in fluid communication with the semipermeable portion of the wall; a dry or substantially dry state drug layer located within the cavity adjacent to the exit orifice and in direct or indirect contacting relationship with the expandable layer; and a flow-promoting layer interposed between the inner surface of the wall and at least the external surface of the drug layer located within the cavity, wherein the drug layer comprises a compound of the present invention, including a polymorph, solvate, hydrate, dehydrate, co-crystal, anhydrous, or amorphous form thereof. See U.S. Pat. No. 6,368,626, the entirety of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Another specific dosage form of the invention comprises: a wall defining a cavity, the wall having an exit orifice formed or formable therein and at least a portion of the wall being semipermeable; an expandable layer located within the cavity remote from the exit orifice and in fluid communication with the semipermeable portion of the wall; a drug layer located within the cavity adjacent the exit orifice and in direct or indirect contacting relationship with the expandable layer; the drug layer comprising a liquid, active agent formulation absorbed in porous particles, the porous particles being adapted to resist compaction forces sufficient to form a compacted drug layer without significant exudation of the liquid, active agent formulation, the dosage form optionally having a placebo layer between the exit orifice and the drug layer, wherein the active agent formulation comprises a compound of the present invention, including a polymorph, solvate, hydrate, dehydrate, co-crystal, anhydrous, or amorphous form thereof. See U.S. Pat. No. 6,342,249, the entirety of which is incorporated herein
  • transdermal Delivery System The controlled release formulations of the present invention may be formulated as a transdermal delivery system, such as transdermal patches.
  • a transdermal patch comprises a compound of the present invention contained in a reservoir or a matrix, and an adhesive which allows the transdermal device to adhere to the skin, allowing the passage of the active agent from the transdermal device through the skin of the patient. Once the compound has penetrated the skin layer, the drug is absorbed into the blood stream where it exerts desired pharmaceutical effects.
  • the transdermal patch releases the compound of the present invention in a controlled-release manner, such that the blood levels of the a compound of the present invention is maintained at a therapeutically effective level through out the dosing period, and the blood levels of the a compound of the present invention is maintained at a concentration that is sufficient to reduce side effects associated with immediate release dosage forms but not sufficient to negate the therapeutic effectiveness of the compound.
  • Transdermal refers to the delivery of a compound by passage through the skin or mucosal tissue and into the blood stream. There are four main types of transdermal patches listed below.
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration in the mouth include lozenges comprising the active ingredient in a flavored base, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth; pastilles comprising the active ingredient in an inert base such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia; and mouthwashes comprising the active ingredient in a suitable liquid carrier.
  • Formulations for rectal administration may be presented as a suppository with a suitable base comprising for example cocoa butter or a salicylate.
  • Formulations suitable for vaginal administration may be presented as pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing in addition to the active ingredient such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral administration include aqueous and non-aqueous isotonic sterile injection solutions which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats and solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient; and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions which may include suspending agents and thickening agents.
  • the formulations may be presented in unit-dose or multi-dose sealed containers, for example, ampoules and vials, and may be stored in a freeze-dried (lyophilized) condition requiring only the addition of the sterile liquid carrier, for example water for injections, immediately prior to use.
  • Injection solutions and suspensions may be prepared from sterile powders, granules and tablets of the kind previously described.
  • the unit dosage formulations are those containing a daily dose or unit, daily sub-dose, or an appropriate fraction thereof, of a drug.
  • the specific dose level for any particular patient will depend on a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the individual being treated; the time and route of administration; the rate of excretion; other drugs which have previously been administered; and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy, as is well understood by those skilled in the art.
  • the compounds in this invention may be prepared by the processes described in relevant published literature procedures that are used by those skilled in the art.
  • Carboxylic acid-containing compounds and related compounds may be prepared as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,465,687 and 6,747,048, U.S. Published Application Nos. 2004/0097589, 2004/0116387, 2004/0220147, and 2005/0004184, WO 00/07972, WO 01/36365, and WO 2004/007430, each herein incorporated by reference.
  • the following Schemes may be used to prepare phosphorus-containing compounds. It should be understood that the following Schemes are provided solely for the purpose of illustration and do not limit the invention which is defined by the claims.
  • PG refers to a protecting group and FG refers to a functional group that can be transformed into T. Protection and deprotection in the Schemes may be carried out according to the procedures generally known in the art (e.g., “Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis,” 3rd Edition, Wiley, 1999).
  • All stereoisomers of the compounds of the instant invention are contemplated, either in admixture or in pure or substantially pure form.
  • the processes for preparation can utilize racemates, enantiomers or diastereomers as starting materials.
  • enantiomeric or diastereomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods, for example, chromatographic or fractional crystallization.
  • Prodrugs can be introduced at different stages of the synthesis. Most often these prodrugs are made from the phosphonic acids because of their lability.
  • Phosphonic acids of Formula I-VII can be alkylated with electrophiles such as alkyl halides and alkyl sulfonates under nucleophilic substitution conditions to give phosphonate esters.
  • compounds of Formula I-VII wherein YR 11 is an acyloxyalkyl group can be prepared by direct alkylation of compounds of Formula I-VII with an appropriate acyloxyalkyl halide (e.g., Cl, Br, I; Phosphorus Sulfur 54:143 (1990); Synthesis 62 (1988)) in the presence of a suitable base (e.g., pyridine, TEA, diisopropylethylamine) in suitable solvents such as DMF ( J. Med.
  • a suitable base e.g., pyridine, TEA, diisopropylethylamine
  • the carboxylate component of these acyloxyalkyl halides includes but is not limited to acetate, propionate, isobutyrate, pivalate, benzoate, carbonate and other carboxylates.
  • Dimethylformamide dialkyl acetals can also be used for the alkylation of phosphonic acids ( Collect. Czech Chem. Commu. 59:1853 (1994)).
  • Compounds of Formula I-VII wherein YR 11 is a cyclic carbonate, a lactone or a phthalidyl group can also be synthesized by direct alkylation of the free phosphonic acids with appropriate halides in the presence of a suitable base such as NaH or diisopropylethylamine ( J. Med. Chem. 38:1372 (1995); J. Med. Chem. 37:1857 (1994); J. Pharm. Sci. 76:180 (1987)).
  • these phosphonate prodrugs can be synthesized by the reactions of the corresponding dichlorophosphonates and an alcohol ( Collect Czech Chem. Commun. 59:1853 (1994)).
  • a dichlorophosphonate is reacted with substituted phenols and arylalkyl alcohols in the presence of a base such as pyridine or TEA to give the compounds of Formula I-VII wherein YR 11 is an aryl group ( J. Med. Chem. 39:4109 (1996); J. Med. Chem. 38:1372 (1995); J. Med. Chem. 37:498 (1994)) or an arylalkyl group ( J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans.
  • the disulfide-containing prodrugs can be prepared from a dichlorophosphonate and 2-hydroxyethyldisulfide under standard conditions. Dichlorophosphonates are also useful for the preparation of various phosphonamides as prodrugs.
  • treatment of a dichlorophosphonate with ammonia gives both a monophosphonamide and a diphosphonamide
  • treatment of a dichlorophosphonate with 1-amino-3-propanol gives a cyclic 1,3-propylphosplionamide
  • treatment of a chlorophosphonate monophenyl ester with an amino acid ester in the presence of a suitable base gives a substituted monophenyl monophosphonamidate.
  • Such reactive dichlorophosphonates can be generated from the corresponding phosphonic acids with a chlorinating agent (e.g., thionyl chloride, J. Med. Chem. 1857 (1994); oxalyl chloride, Tetrahedron Lett. 31:3261 (1990); phosphorous pentachloride, Synthesis 490 (1974)).
  • a dichlorophosphonate can be generated from its corresponding disilyl phosphonate esters ( Synth. Commu. 17:1071 (1987)) or dialkyl phosphonate esters ( Tetrahedron Lett. 24:4405 (1983); Bull. Soc. Chim. 130:485 (1993)).
  • compounds of Formula I-VII can be mixed phosphonate ester (e.g., phenyl and benzyl esters, or phenyl and acyloxyalkyl esters) including the chemically combined mixed esters such as phenyl and benzyl combined prodrugs reported in Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 7:99 (1997).
  • mixed phosphonate ester e.g., phenyl and benzyl esters, or phenyl and acyloxyalkyl esters
  • Dichlorophosphonates are also useful for the preparation of various phosphonamides as prodrugs.
  • a dichlorophosphonate with an amine e.g. an amino acid alkyl ester such as L-alanine ethyl ester
  • a suitable base e.g. triethylamine, pyridine, etc.
  • treatment of a dichlorophosphonate with 1-amino-3-propanol gives a cyclic 1,3-propylphosphonamide
  • treatment of a chlorophosphonate monophenyl ester with an amino acid ester in the presence of a suitable base gives a substituted monophenyl monophosphonamidate.
  • the SATE (S-acetyl thioethyl) prodrugs can be synthesized by the coupling reaction of the phosphonic acids of Formula I-VII and S-acyl-2-thioethanol in the presence of DCC, EDCI or PyBOP ( J. Med. Chem. 39:1981 (1996)).
  • Cyclic phosphonate esters of substituted 1,3-propane diols can be synthesized by either reactions of the corresponding dichlorophosphonate with a substituted 1,3-propanediol or coupling reactions using suitable coupling reagents (e.g., DCC, EDCI, PyBOP; Synthesis 62 (1988)).
  • the reactive dichlorophosphonate intermediates can be prepared from the corresponding acids and chlorinating agents such as thionyl chloride ( J. Med. Chem. 1857 (1994)), oxalyl chloride ( Tetrahedron Lett. 31:3261 (1990)) and phosphorus pentachloride ( Synthesis 490 (1974)).
  • dichlorophosphonates can also be generated from disilyl esters ( Synth. Commun. 17:1071 (1987)) and dialkyl esters ( Tetrahedron Lett. 24:4405 (1983); Bull. Soc. Chim. Fr., 130:485 (1993)).
  • these cyclic phosphonate esters of substituted 1,3-propane diols are prepared from phosphonic acids by coupling with diols under Mitsunobu reaction conditions ( Synthesis 1 (1981); J Org. Chem. 52:6331 (1992)), and other acid coupling reagents including, but not limited to, carbodiimides ( Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun. 59:1853 (1994); Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 2:145 (1992); Tetrahedron Lett. 29:1189 (1988)), and benzotriazolyloxytris-(dimethylamino) phosphonium salts ( Tetrahedron Lett. 34:6743 (1993)).
  • Phosphonic acids also undergo cyclic prodrug formation with cyclic acetals or cyclic ortho esters of substituted propane-1,3-diols to provide prodrugs as in the case of carboxylic acid esters ( Helv. Chim. Acta. 48:1746 (1965)).
  • more reactive cyclic sulfites or sulfates are also suitable coupling precursors to react with phosphonic acid salts. These precursors can be made from the corresponding diols as described in the literature.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
US11/814,824 2005-05-26 2006-05-26 Thyromimetics for the Treatment of Fatty Liver Diseases Abandoned US20090232879A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/814,824 US20090232879A1 (en) 2005-05-26 2006-05-26 Thyromimetics for the Treatment of Fatty Liver Diseases

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US68457205P 2005-05-26 2005-05-26
PCT/US2006/020610 WO2006128058A2 (en) 2005-05-26 2006-05-26 Thyromimetics for the treatment of fatty liver diseases
US11/814,824 US20090232879A1 (en) 2005-05-26 2006-05-26 Thyromimetics for the Treatment of Fatty Liver Diseases

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
USPCT/US2006/128058 A-371-Of-International 2005-05-26 2006-05-26
PCT/US2006/020610 A-371-Of-International WO2006128058A2 (en) 2003-11-19 2006-05-26 Thyromimetics for the treatment of fatty liver diseases

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/955,292 Continuation US10130643B2 (en) 2005-05-26 2010-11-29 Thyromimetics for the treatment of fatty liver diseases

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20090232879A1 true US20090232879A1 (en) 2009-09-17

Family

ID=37421001

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/814,824 Abandoned US20090232879A1 (en) 2005-05-26 2006-05-26 Thyromimetics for the Treatment of Fatty Liver Diseases
US12/955,292 Active 2027-04-26 US10130643B2 (en) 2005-05-26 2010-11-29 Thyromimetics for the treatment of fatty liver diseases
US16/195,782 Active 2026-07-11 US10925885B2 (en) 2005-05-26 2018-11-19 Thyromimetics for the treatment of fatty liver diseases

Family Applications After (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/955,292 Active 2027-04-26 US10130643B2 (en) 2005-05-26 2010-11-29 Thyromimetics for the treatment of fatty liver diseases
US16/195,782 Active 2026-07-11 US10925885B2 (en) 2005-05-26 2018-11-19 Thyromimetics for the treatment of fatty liver diseases

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (3) US20090232879A1 (de)
EP (1) EP1898926A2 (de)
JP (1) JP2008542301A (de)
AU (1) AU2006249350B2 (de)
CA (1) CA2606499C (de)
MX (1) MX2007014502A (de)
WO (1) WO2006128058A2 (de)

Cited By (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090275590A1 (en) * 2008-01-11 2009-11-05 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US20110003738A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azapolycycle mch-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US20110003739A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine mch-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US20110003737A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine mch-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US20110003793A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. AZINONE-SUBSTITUTED AZEPINO[b]INDOLE AND PYRIDO-PYRROLO-AZEPINE MCH-1 ANTAGONISTS, METHODS OF MAKING, AND USE THEREOF
US8697700B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2014-04-15 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Piperazinone-substituted tetrahydro-carboline MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and uses thereof
US8993765B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2015-03-31 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Tetrahydro-azacarboline MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and uses thereof
US9090547B2 (en) 2009-05-19 2015-07-28 Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Method for producing trisphenols and monoester-substituted products thereof, and 4-acylaralkylphenol derivatives
WO2017049157A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Duke University Methods and compositions for the treatment of steatosis-associated disorders
KR20190039027A (ko) * 2016-04-22 2019-04-10 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 갑상선 베타-작용제의 사용
WO2020118564A1 (en) * 2018-12-12 2020-06-18 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Novel thyromimetics
CN112457346A (zh) * 2019-08-19 2021-03-09 苏州闻天医药科技有限公司 一种并环THRβ受体激动剂化合物及其制备方法和用途
WO2021257851A1 (en) * 2020-06-17 2021-12-23 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics
WO2021257834A1 (en) * 2020-06-17 2021-12-23 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics
US11667606B2 (en) 2019-03-01 2023-06-06 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics
US11707472B2 (en) 2017-06-05 2023-07-25 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions for the treatment of fibrosis
US11787828B2 (en) 2018-03-22 2023-10-17 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline forms and methods of producing crystalline forms of a compound
US11827596B2 (en) 2018-12-12 2023-11-28 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics
WO2024183772A1 (zh) * 2023-03-03 2024-09-12 浙江柏拉阿图医药科技有限公司 肝递送调节胆固醇代谢药物环状磷酸酯化合物及应用
US12102646B2 (en) 2018-12-05 2024-10-01 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions for the treatment of fibrosis and inflammation

Families Citing this family (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005051298A2 (en) 2003-11-19 2005-06-09 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Novel phosphorus-containing thyromimetics
US20090232879A1 (en) 2005-05-26 2009-09-17 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics for the Treatment of Fatty Liver Diseases
US8877816B2 (en) 2007-11-21 2014-11-04 Decode Genetics Ehf 4-(or 5-) substituted catechol derivatives
EA201170615A1 (ru) 2008-10-27 2011-12-30 Кадила Хелзкэр Лимитед Лиганды рецептора тиреоидного гормона
WO2010086878A2 (en) 2009-01-09 2010-08-05 Cadila Healthcare Limited Thyroid receptor modulators
WO2011038207A1 (en) * 2009-09-25 2011-03-31 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Phosphorus-containing thyroid hormone receptor agonists and methods of use
PT3104939T (pt) 2014-02-10 2024-07-17 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Center Tratamento de ataque cardíaco e lesão isquémica com iodeto de sódio
JP6982004B2 (ja) * 2016-05-18 2021-12-17 オレゴン ヘルス アンド サイエンス ユニバーシティ ソベチロム誘導体
KR102537274B1 (ko) * 2016-08-12 2023-05-25 오레곤 헬스 앤드 사이언스 유니버시티 아마이드 화합물, 이의 약학 조성물 및 이들을 이용하는 방법
KR20240074912A (ko) * 2016-09-16 2024-05-28 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 갑상선-관련 부작용을 감소시키는 방법
KR20190104524A (ko) 2016-11-21 2019-09-10 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 당원축적질환의 치료 방법
MX2020008498A (es) * 2018-02-14 2020-09-25 Univ Oregon Health & Science Derivados de sobetirome.
EP3823629A4 (de) * 2018-07-19 2022-05-04 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Phosphinamid-prodrugs von tenofovir
WO2020117987A1 (en) * 2018-12-05 2020-06-11 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for the treatment of liver disorders
WO2021032218A1 (zh) 2019-08-19 2021-02-25 苏州闻天医药科技有限公司 一种并环THRβ受体激动剂化合物及其制备方法和用途
CN111116684B (zh) * 2019-12-31 2020-09-25 厦门甘宝利生物医药有限公司 一种具有甲状腺激素受体激动剂特性的肝靶向化合物及其药物组合物
US11752161B2 (en) 2020-03-27 2023-09-12 Gannex Pharma Co., Ltd. Pharmaceutical compositions, method of making and method of using thereof
WO2021257806A1 (en) * 2020-06-18 2021-12-23 Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center Iodide for treatment of nonthyroidal illness syndrome
CN114763363B (zh) * 2021-01-12 2024-10-01 上海喀露蓝科技有限公司 磷酸或磷酸酯类衍生物及其制备方法和其在医药上的用途
WO2024143235A1 (ja) * 2022-12-26 2024-07-04 国立大学法人東海国立大学機構 甲状腺ホルモン受容体β選択的な甲状腺ホルモンアナログとして有用な化合物
CN115650928B (zh) * 2022-12-28 2023-03-31 凯思凯旭(上海)医药科技有限公司 一种多环类甲状腺激素β受体激动剂及其用途

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6576636B2 (en) * 1996-05-22 2003-06-10 Protarga, Inc. Method of treating a liver disorder with fatty acid-antiviral agent conjugates
US7514419B2 (en) * 2003-11-19 2009-04-07 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Phosphorus-containing thyromimetics

Family Cites Families (160)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3120551A (en) 1961-03-20 1964-02-04 Warner Lambert Pharmaceutical 5-(4-biphenylyl)-3-methylvaleric acid and functional derivatives thereof
US3357887A (en) 1962-12-03 1967-12-12 Upjohn Co 4-phenoxy-3, 5-dihalophenylalkanols and hypocholesteremic compositions containing the same
US4069343A (en) 1973-03-23 1978-01-17 American Home Products Corporation Oxamic acid derivatives for the prevention of immediate type hypersensitivity reactions
US4069347A (en) 1976-08-02 1978-01-17 Emery Industries, Inc. Compositions of quaternary ammonium derivatives of lanolin acids
US4426453A (en) 1980-09-18 1984-01-17 Amersham International Limited Derivatives of iodothyronine compounds and their use in an assay for the free iodothyronine compounds
DE3037858A1 (de) 1980-10-07 1982-05-19 Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh, 6800 Mannheim Verfahren zur herstellung von reaktiven, kupplungsfaehigen derivaten der schilddruesenhormone t (pfeil abwaerts)3(pfeil abwaerts) und t (pfeil abwaerts)4(pfeil abwaerts) und deren verwendung
US4554290A (en) 1983-06-17 1985-11-19 Ciba-Geigy Corporation Oxamic acid derivatives
US4673691A (en) 1984-11-05 1987-06-16 Nicholas Bachynsky Human weight loss inducing method
GB8501372D0 (en) 1985-01-18 1985-02-20 Smith Kline French Lab Chemical compounds
US5061798A (en) 1985-01-18 1991-10-29 Smith Kline & French Laboratories, Ltd. Benzyl pyridyl and pyridazinyl compounds
US4968788A (en) 1986-04-04 1990-11-06 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Biologically reversible phosphate and phosphonate protective gruops
US5091552A (en) 1986-06-30 1992-02-25 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Novel antitumor aldophosphamide analogs
DE3718638A1 (de) 1987-06-04 1988-12-22 Thomae Gmbh Dr K Neue phenylethanolamine, diese verbindungen enthaltende arzneimittel und verfahren zu ihrer herstellung
US4929600A (en) 1988-03-18 1990-05-29 University Of Deleware Endocrine manipulation to improve body composition of poultry
US5116828A (en) 1989-10-26 1992-05-26 Nippon Zoki Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Pharmaceutical composition for treatment of osteoporosis
IE903851A1 (en) 1989-11-03 1991-05-08 Boots Pharma Inc Iodothyronine polymers
US5158978A (en) 1990-02-05 1992-10-27 British Technology Group (U.S.A.) Thyroid hormone treatment of acute cardiovascular compromise
WO1991011181A1 (en) 1990-02-05 1991-08-08 British Technology Group (Usa) Incorporated Thyroid hormone cardiac treatment
EP0481214B1 (de) 1990-09-14 1998-06-24 Institute Of Organic Chemistry And Biochemistry Of The Academy Of Sciences Of The Czech Republic Wirkstoffvorläufer von Phosphonaten
ES2115638T3 (es) 1991-12-30 1998-07-01 Akzo Nobel Nv Composicion tiroactiva de liberacion controlada.
US5284971A (en) 1992-07-16 1994-02-08 Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. 4-(3-cyclohexyl-4-hydroxy or-methoxy phenylsulfonyl) 3,5 dibromo phenyl acetic thyromimetic cholesterol-lowering agents
ES2108855T3 (es) 1992-07-21 1998-01-01 Ciba Geigy Ag Derivados de acido oxamico como agentes hipocolesteremicos.
US5741803A (en) 1992-09-05 1998-04-21 Smithkline Beecham Plc Substituted thiazolidinedionle derivatives
US5571840A (en) 1993-06-22 1996-11-05 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Method for treating central nervous system ischemia
US5519163A (en) 1993-10-15 1996-05-21 Merck & Co., Inc. Inhibitors of phosphoinositide-specific phospholipase C
GB9401892D0 (en) 1994-02-01 1994-03-30 Boots Co Plc Therapeutic agents
AU1942995A (en) 1994-03-15 1995-10-03 K.U. Leuven Research & Development New use of growth hormone
GB9416219D0 (en) 1994-08-11 1994-10-05 Karobio Ab Receptor ligands
DE19502209A1 (de) 1995-01-25 1996-08-01 Hoechst Ag Phosphonoessigsäure-Derivate und deren Verwendung zur Behandlung von degenerativen Gelenkserkrankungen
US6221911B1 (en) 1995-06-07 2001-04-24 Karo Bio Ab Uses for thyroid hormone compounds or thyroid hormone-like compounds
EP0831769B2 (de) 1995-06-07 2008-07-23 Lavin, Dr., Thomas N. Neue verwendungen von thyroidhormonen oder thyroidhormon aehnliche verbindungen
US6380255B1 (en) 1995-06-07 2002-04-30 Karo Bio Ab Treatment for dermal skin atrophy using thyroid hormone compounds or thyroid hormone-like compounds
EP0873361B1 (de) 1995-12-13 2006-11-02 The Regents Of The University Of California Kristalle der mit einem Ligand komplexierten Ligandenbindedomäne des Schilddrüsenhormonrezeptors
US6266622B1 (en) 1995-12-13 2001-07-24 Regents Of The University Of California Nuclear receptor ligands and ligand binding domains
US6361992B1 (en) 1996-05-08 2002-03-26 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Thyroid stimulating hormone superagonists
EP0923585B1 (de) 1996-07-18 2002-05-08 Pfizer Inc. Matrix metalloprotease-inhibitoren auf basis von phosphinsäuren
KR100405285B1 (ko) 1996-08-20 2003-11-12 더 리전트 오브 더 유니버시티 오브 캘리포니아 합성 티로이드 호르몬을 포함하는 약제 조성물
IL129394A (en) 1996-10-24 2002-05-23 Novartis Ag Amino-alkaline phosphonic acids are converted
WO1998041216A1 (en) 1997-03-17 1998-09-24 Tam Yun K Composition for prevention of hepatic steatosis
US5951989A (en) 1997-04-07 1999-09-14 Heymann; Warren R. Method for the treatment of dry skin
US5883294A (en) 1997-06-18 1999-03-16 The Regeants Of The University Of California Selective thyroid hormone analogs
GB9713739D0 (en) 1997-06-27 1997-09-03 Karobio Ab Thyroid receptor ligands
US5922775A (en) 1997-10-23 1999-07-13 Octamer, Inc. Method of treating malignant tumors with ketone thyroxine analogues having no significant hormonal activity
JP2001525367A (ja) 1997-12-11 2001-12-11 ザ・チャンセラー・マスターズ・アンド・スカラーズ・オブ・ザ・ユニバーシティ・オブ・オックスフォード 膜関連ウイルス複製の阻害
CA2319592A1 (en) 1998-02-03 1999-08-05 University Of Maryland Method for the stimulation of sperm production and gonadal development in animals
ES2401070T3 (es) 1998-03-06 2013-04-16 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Nuevos profármacos para compuestos que contienen fósforo
JP2002516855A (ja) 1998-06-02 2002-06-11 アースロミックス・パブリック・リミテッド・カンパニー 繊維症治療用の甲状腺ホルモン受容体と相互作用する化合物
IL140140A0 (en) 1998-06-30 2002-02-10 Univ California Thyroid hormone analogues and methods for their preparation
GB9816935D0 (en) 1998-08-05 1998-09-30 Karobio Ab Novel glucocortoid and thyroid receptor ligands for the treatment of metabolic disorders
EP0994570A1 (de) 1998-10-12 2000-04-19 Sony International (Europe) GmbH Spreizspektrumkanalschätzer mit Zwischenpfadstörungsreduktion
GB9828442D0 (en) 1998-12-24 1999-02-17 Karobio Ab Novel thyroid receptor ligands and method II
JP4614031B2 (ja) 1999-02-23 2011-01-19 小野薬品工業株式会社 リン酸誘導体を有効成分とする薬剤
ATE272609T1 (de) 1999-03-01 2004-08-15 Pfizer Prod Inc Oxamsäure und deren derivate als liganden der thyroid-rezeptoren
PT1033364E (pt) 1999-03-01 2005-07-29 Pfizer Prod Inc Ciano com acidos oxamicos e derivados como ligandos de receptores de tiroide
US6344481B1 (en) 1999-03-01 2002-02-05 Pfizer Inc. Thyromimetic antiobesity agents
ES2272268T3 (es) 1999-03-05 2007-05-01 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Nuevos profarmacos que contienen fosforo.
US6599942B1 (en) 1999-03-29 2003-07-29 Novartis Ag Thyromimetic organic compounds
US6790978B2 (en) 1999-03-29 2004-09-14 Novartis Ag Thyromimetic organic compounds
CO5160290A1 (es) 1999-03-29 2002-05-30 Novartis Ag Derivados de acido fenoxifeniloxamico sustituido .
US6776984B1 (en) 1999-08-20 2004-08-17 George R. Schwartz Induced regeneration and repair of damaged neurons and nerve axon myelin
ES2226839T3 (es) 1999-05-05 2005-04-01 MERCK & CO., INC. Nuevos catecoles como agentes antimicrobianos.
WO2001010384A2 (en) 1999-08-10 2001-02-15 Joslin Diabetes Center, Inc. Method for identifying compounds for treatment of insulin resistance
US6566372B1 (en) 1999-08-27 2003-05-20 Ligand Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Bicyclic androgen and progesterone receptor modulator compounds and methods
EP1210354A1 (de) 1999-09-08 2002-06-05 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Prodrugs für leberspezifische verabreichung von arzneimitteln
US6414002B1 (en) 1999-09-22 2002-07-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Substituted acid derivatives useful as antidiabetic and antiobesity agents and method
US6787652B1 (en) 1999-09-30 2004-09-07 Pfizer, Inc. 6-Azauracil derivatives as thyroid receptor ligands
US6627660B1 (en) 1999-11-16 2003-09-30 New River Pharmaceuticals Inc. Stabilized thyroxine compounds
GB9927056D0 (en) * 1999-11-17 2000-01-12 Karobio Ab Thyroid receptor antagonists for the treatment of cardiac and metabolic disorders
EP1127882A1 (de) 2000-01-25 2001-08-29 Pfizer Products Inc. Tetrazolverbindungen als Thyroid-Rezeptor-Liganden
PL201790B1 (pl) 2000-02-17 2009-05-29 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Anilinopochodny ligand dla receptora tarczycy, jego zastosowanie i kompozycja farmaceutyczna
US6852706B1 (en) 2000-03-22 2005-02-08 The Wistar Institute Methods and compositions for healing heart wounds
US6664291B2 (en) 2000-03-31 2003-12-16 Pfizer, Inc. Malonamic acids and derivatives thereof as thyroid receptor ligands
AP2002002634A0 (en) 2000-03-31 2002-09-30 Pfizer Prod Inc Malonamic Acids And Derivatives Thereof As Thyroid Receptor Ligands.
WO2001079287A2 (en) 2000-04-17 2001-10-25 Sa Majesté La Reine Du Chef Du Canada - Agriculture Et Agroalimentaire Canada Steatosis-modulating factors and uses thereof
US6620830B2 (en) 2000-04-21 2003-09-16 Pfizer, Inc. Thyroid receptor ligands
US6395784B1 (en) 2000-06-07 2002-05-28 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Benzamide ligands for the thyroid receptor
GB0015205D0 (en) 2000-06-21 2000-08-09 Karobio Ab Bioisosteric thyroid receptor ligands and method
HUP0301416A2 (hu) 2000-07-06 2003-09-29 Delsys Pharmaceutical Corporation Javított tiroid hormon gyógyszerformák
EP1299418A1 (de) 2000-07-10 2003-04-09 BTG INTERNATIONAL LIMITED (Company No. 2664412) Insulinderivat und seine synthese
KR20030036658A (ko) 2000-08-01 2003-05-09 시오노기 앤드 컴파니, 리미티드 비만 또는 지방간의 예방 또는 치료제
IL137672A0 (en) 2000-08-03 2001-10-31 Dpharm Ltd Derivatives of branched-chain lipophilic molecules and uses thereof
DE10038007A1 (de) 2000-08-04 2002-02-14 Bayer Ag Neue Amino-und Amido-Diphenylether für Arzneimittel
AU2001288294A1 (en) 2000-08-21 2002-03-04 Merck And Co., Inc. Anti-hypercholesterolemic drug combination
DE10046029A1 (de) 2000-09-18 2002-03-28 Bayer Ag Indazole
AU9479201A (en) 2000-09-27 2002-04-08 Ilex Oncology Res S A Alpha-substituted beta-aminoethyl phosphonates
AU2002223626A1 (en) 2000-10-20 2002-04-29 Novartis Ag Combinations of a thyromimetic compound and a statin
WO2002051805A1 (de) 2000-12-27 2002-07-04 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Indol-derivate
US6982348B2 (en) 2001-01-26 2006-01-03 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Aminoethanol derivatives
AU2002228317A1 (en) 2001-01-29 2002-08-12 Insight Strategy And Marketing Ltd Benz-1,3-azole derivatives and their uses as heparanase inhibitors
US6534676B2 (en) 2001-01-31 2003-03-18 The Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Of The University Of Arizona Method to treat chronic heart failure and/or elevated cholesterol levels using 3,5-diiodothyropropionic acid and method to prepare same
US6716877B2 (en) 2001-01-31 2004-04-06 The Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Of The University Of Arizona Method to treat chronic heart failure and/or elevated cholesterol levels
CA2435820A1 (en) 2001-02-08 2002-08-15 Karo Bio Ab Phenoxy substituted benzocondensed heteroaryl derivatives as thyroid receptor ligands
US20020193440A1 (en) 2001-02-20 2002-12-19 Ritter Steven C. Liothyronine sodium and levothyroxine sodium combination
MXPA03008229A (es) 2001-03-14 2004-11-12 Lilly Co Eli Trienos fluorados y su uso como moduladores rxr.
DE10115408A1 (de) 2001-03-29 2002-10-02 Bayer Ag Benzofuran-Derivate
US6825201B2 (en) 2001-04-25 2004-11-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Indole, azaindole and related heterocyclic amidopiperazine derivatives
GB0111861D0 (en) 2001-05-15 2001-07-04 Karobio Ab Novel compounds
FR2825926A1 (fr) 2001-06-14 2002-12-20 Sod Conseils Rech Applic Derives d'imidazoles modulant les canaux sodiques
WO2003003013A1 (en) 2001-06-29 2003-01-09 University Of Massachusetts Non-nuclear effects of thyroid hormone
DE60131967D1 (de) 2001-08-13 2008-01-31 Phenex Pharmaceuticals Ag Nr1h4-kern-rezeptor-bindende verbindungen
WO2003061557A2 (en) 2001-08-14 2003-07-31 King Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Levothyroxine pharmaceutical compositions, methods of making and methods of administration
US7279593B2 (en) 2001-08-24 2007-10-09 Karo Bio Ab Prime ring substituted thyroid receptor antagonists for the treatment of cardiac and metabolic disorders
EP1297833B1 (de) * 2001-09-26 2005-12-21 Pfizer Products Inc. Indolcaroboxylsäure als Thyroidrezeptor-Liganden
US6806381B2 (en) 2001-11-02 2004-10-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for the preparation of aniline-derived thyroid receptor ligands
WO2003040114A1 (en) 2001-11-06 2003-05-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Substituted acid derivatives useful as antidiabetic and antiobesity agents and method
US6831102B2 (en) 2001-12-07 2004-12-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Phenyl naphthol ligands for thyroid hormone receptor
US20050070506A1 (en) 2002-01-18 2005-03-31 Doherty George A. Selective s1p1/edg1 receptor agonists
US7230031B2 (en) 2002-01-30 2007-06-12 Kissei Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Thyroid hormone receptor ligand, medicinal compositions containing the same and use thereof
US7208481B2 (en) 2002-02-19 2007-04-24 Ilex Products, Inc. Aminodiphosphonate apolipoprotein E modulators
JP2006500909A (ja) 2002-03-04 2006-01-12 スミスクライン ビーチャム コーポレーション 甲状腺ホルモン代謝ならびにコレステロールおよび脂質代謝を核内受容体ｃａｒを介して調節するための組成物および方法
US20040029187A1 (en) 2002-03-25 2004-02-12 Palmer Michelle A.J. Systems and methods for detection of nuclear receptor function using reporter enzyme mutant complementation
GB0208384D0 (en) 2002-04-11 2002-05-22 Karobio Ab Novel compounds
AU2003225305A1 (en) 2002-05-08 2003-11-11 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Pyridine-based thyroid receptor ligands
EP1364962A1 (de) 2002-05-24 2003-11-26 Stichting tot bevordering van de wetenschap der Endocrinologie Verwendung von Monocarboxylat-Transporterproteinen zum Transport von Thyroidhormonen
CA2489323A1 (en) 2002-06-15 2003-12-24 Enteromed, Inc. Treatment of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease
US20040137441A1 (en) 2003-01-15 2004-07-15 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Modulation of thyroid hormone receptor interactor 3 expression
WO2004005342A1 (en) 2002-07-04 2004-01-15 Zealand Pharma A/S Glp-1 and methods for treating diabetes
MXPA05000279A (es) 2002-07-09 2005-03-31 Squibb Bristol Myers Co Derivados heterociclicos sustituidos utiles como agentes antidiabeticos y antiobesidad y metodo.
GB0215978D0 (en) 2002-07-10 2002-08-21 Karobio Ab Novel compounds
AU2003268078A1 (en) 2002-08-10 2004-02-25 King Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Levothyroxine compositions and methods
GB0219022D0 (en) 2002-08-15 2002-09-25 Karobio Ab Novel thyromimetic compounds
WO2004026097A2 (en) 2002-09-19 2004-04-01 First Circle Medical, Inc. Treatment of steatosis using hyperthermia
US20040152783A1 (en) 2002-11-05 2004-08-05 Olon Lawrence Peter Controlled absorption of admixed thyroid hormone formulations
ITMI20022777A1 (it) 2002-12-27 2004-06-28 Altergon Sa Formulazioni farmaceutiche per ormoni tiroidei e procedimenti per il loro ottenimento.
US20040142868A1 (en) 2003-01-21 2004-07-22 Sleeman Mark W. Method of treating liver steatosis in a mammal
JP2006516620A (ja) 2003-01-24 2006-07-06 ブリストル−マイヤーズ　スクイブ　カンパニー 甲状腺受容体におけるシクロアルキル含有アニリドリガンド
TW200504021A (en) 2003-01-24 2005-02-01 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Substituted anilide ligands for the thyroid receptor
US7135575B2 (en) 2003-03-03 2006-11-14 Array Biopharma, Inc. P38 inhibitors and methods of use thereof
WO2004078947A2 (en) 2003-03-05 2004-09-16 Zymogenetics, Inc. Use of thyroid-stimulating hormone to induce lipolysis
AU2003901813A0 (en) 2003-04-15 2003-05-01 Vital Health Sciences Pty Ltd Pharmaceutical derivatives
US7557143B2 (en) 2003-04-18 2009-07-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Thyroid receptor ligands
WO2004103289A2 (en) 2003-05-14 2004-12-02 New York University Driverse thyroid hormone receptor antagonists and uses thereof
ITRM20030363A1 (it) 2003-07-24 2005-01-25 Fernando Goglia Composizioni comprendenti la 3, 5diiodotironina e uso farmaceutico di esse.
US7470807B2 (en) * 2003-08-14 2008-12-30 Asahi Kasei Pharma Corporation Substituted arylalkanoic acid derivatives and use thereof
US6952844B2 (en) 2003-08-27 2005-10-11 Danaher Thomas C Bed-tent
WO2005028488A1 (en) 2003-09-12 2005-03-31 Quatrx Pharmaceuticals Co. Heteroaryl phosphinyl and thiophosphinyl compounds for regulation of glucose, triglycerides, and ldl/hdl levels
AU2004273986B2 (en) 2003-09-15 2010-04-22 Nanopharmaceuticals Llc Thyroid hormone analogs and methods of use in angiogenesis
EP1666035A4 (de) 2003-09-26 2010-04-28 Chugai Pharmaceutical Co Ltd Medizinische zusammensetzung zur behandlung von fettleber oder lebererkrankung
AU2004285923A1 (en) 2003-10-27 2005-05-12 Genelabs Technologies, Inc. Nucleoside compounds for treating viral infections
JP5142716B2 (ja) 2004-06-08 2013-02-13 リガンド・ファーマシューティカルズ・インコーポレイテッド サイクリックエステルのルイス酸介在合成法
AU2006249347A1 (en) 2005-05-26 2006-11-30 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Novel phosphorus-containing thyromimetics
US20090232879A1 (en) * 2005-05-26 2009-09-17 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics for the Treatment of Fatty Liver Diseases
JP2008545711A (ja) 2005-05-26 2008-12-18 メタバシス・セラピューティクス・インコーポレイテッド 新規ホスフィン酸含有甲状腺ホルモン様剤
PT1919878E (pt) 2005-07-21 2010-11-02 Hoffmann La Roche Derivados de piridazinona como agonistas do receptor da hormona da tiróide
WO2009089093A1 (en) 2008-01-04 2009-07-16 Quatrx Pharmaceuticals Company Thyroid hormone receptor agonists
WO2011038207A1 (en) 2009-09-25 2011-03-31 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Phosphorus-containing thyroid hormone receptor agonists and methods of use
WO2013155047A2 (en) 2012-04-10 2013-10-17 Trustees Of Dartmouth College Compounds and methods for inhibiting cif virulence factor
US9587403B2 (en) 2014-04-29 2017-03-07 Platinum Roofing, Inc. Fixture support for membrane roof
WO2015191841A1 (en) 2014-06-12 2015-12-17 Yale University Novel methods of treating or preventing fibrotic lung diseases
MX2018003179A (es) 2015-09-16 2018-08-21 Tobira Therapeutics Inc Terapia de combinación con cenicriviroc para el tratamiento de fibrosis.
US20170319604A1 (en) 2016-04-22 2017-11-09 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Thyroid hormone receptor agonist and use thereof
KR20240074912A (ko) 2016-09-16 2024-05-28 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 갑상선-관련 부작용을 감소시키는 방법
KR20190104524A (ko) 2016-11-21 2019-09-10 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 당원축적질환의 치료 방법
ES2894261T3 (es) 2016-12-09 2022-02-14 Cadila Healthcare Ltd Tratamiento de la colangitis biliar primaria
WO2018193007A1 (en) 2017-04-18 2018-10-25 Genfit Combination comprising a ppar agonist such as elafibranor and an acetyl-coa carboxylase (acc) inhibitor
EP3634426A4 (de) 2017-06-05 2021-04-07 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Zusammensetzungen zur behandlung von fibrose
US11660281B2 (en) 2017-06-29 2023-05-30 Yale University Compositions and methods of treating or preventing fibrotic lung diseases
CN107469086A (zh) 2017-07-31 2017-12-15 深圳市润佳通科技有限公司 甲状腺素受体类似物及其盐或前药在制备治疗和/或预防肺部疾病的药物中的应用
US12102646B2 (en) 2018-12-05 2024-10-01 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions for the treatment of fibrosis and inflammation
WO2020117987A1 (en) 2018-12-05 2020-06-11 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for the treatment of liver disorders

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6576636B2 (en) * 1996-05-22 2003-06-10 Protarga, Inc. Method of treating a liver disorder with fatty acid-antiviral agent conjugates
US7514419B2 (en) * 2003-11-19 2009-04-07 Metabasis Therapeutics, Inc. Phosphorus-containing thyromimetics

Cited By (36)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090275590A1 (en) * 2008-01-11 2009-11-05 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US20100331339A9 (en) * 2008-01-11 2010-12-30 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US9650378B2 (en) 2008-01-11 2017-05-16 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US9296743B2 (en) 2008-01-11 2016-03-29 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US8716308B2 (en) 2008-01-11 2014-05-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. (1-azinone)-substituted pyridoindoles
US9567281B2 (en) 2009-05-19 2017-02-14 Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. 4-acylaralkylphenols and derivatives thereof
US9090547B2 (en) 2009-05-19 2015-07-28 Honshu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Method for producing trisphenols and monoester-substituted products thereof, and 4-acylaralkylphenol derivatives
US8637501B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2014-01-28 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azepino[b]indole and pyrido-pyrrolo-azepine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US20110003738A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azapolycycle mch-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8618299B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2013-12-31 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azapolycycle MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
WO2011003005A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azepino[b]indole and pyrido-pyrrolo-azepine mch-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US9073925B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2015-07-07 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US20110003793A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. AZINONE-SUBSTITUTED AZEPINO[b]INDOLE AND PYRIDO-PYRROLO-AZEPINE MCH-1 ANTAGONISTS, METHODS OF MAKING, AND USE THEREOF
US20110003737A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine mch-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US20110003739A1 (en) * 2009-07-01 2011-01-06 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azinone-substituted azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine mch-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8629158B2 (en) 2009-07-01 2014-01-14 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Azabicycloalkane-indole and azabicycloalkane-pyrrolo-pyridine MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and use thereof
US8697700B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2014-04-15 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Piperazinone-substituted tetrahydro-carboline MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and uses thereof
US8993765B2 (en) 2010-12-21 2015-03-31 Albany Molecular Research, Inc. Tetrahydro-azacarboline MCH-1 antagonists, methods of making, and uses thereof
US10940125B2 (en) 2015-09-18 2021-03-09 Duke University Methods and compositions for the treatment of steatosis-associated disorders
WO2017049157A1 (en) * 2015-09-18 2017-03-23 Duke University Methods and compositions for the treatment of steatosis-associated disorders
US12036190B2 (en) 2015-09-18 2024-07-16 Duke University Methods and compositions for the treatment of cytoplasmic glycogen storage disorders
US11690812B2 (en) 2015-09-18 2023-07-04 Duke University Methods and compositions for the treatment of steatosis-associated disorders
US11951114B2 (en) 2016-04-22 2024-04-09 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Use of thyroid beta-agonists
US11351183B2 (en) 2016-04-22 2022-06-07 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Use of thyroid beta-agonists
KR102407059B1 (ko) 2016-04-22 2022-06-10 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 갑상선 베타-작용제의 사용
KR20190039027A (ko) * 2016-04-22 2019-04-10 바이킹 테라퓨틱스 인코포레이티드 갑상선 베타-작용제의 사용
US11707472B2 (en) 2017-06-05 2023-07-25 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions for the treatment of fibrosis
US11787828B2 (en) 2018-03-22 2023-10-17 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Crystalline forms and methods of producing crystalline forms of a compound
US12102646B2 (en) 2018-12-05 2024-10-01 Viking Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions for the treatment of fibrosis and inflammation
US11827596B2 (en) 2018-12-12 2023-11-28 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics
WO2020118564A1 (en) * 2018-12-12 2020-06-18 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Novel thyromimetics
US11667606B2 (en) 2019-03-01 2023-06-06 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics
CN112457346A (zh) * 2019-08-19 2021-03-09 苏州闻天医药科技有限公司 一种并环THRβ受体激动剂化合物及其制备方法和用途
WO2021257834A1 (en) * 2020-06-17 2021-12-23 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics
WO2021257851A1 (en) * 2020-06-17 2021-12-23 Autobahn Therapeutics, Inc. Thyromimetics
WO2024183772A1 (zh) * 2023-03-03 2024-09-12 浙江柏拉阿图医药科技有限公司 肝递送调节胆固醇代谢药物环状磷酸酯化合物及应用

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20170112864A1 (en) 2017-04-27
AU2006249350B2 (en) 2012-02-16
CA2606499A1 (en) 2006-11-30
US10130643B2 (en) 2018-11-20
US10925885B2 (en) 2021-02-23
AU2006249350A1 (en) 2006-11-30
CA2606499C (en) 2017-06-13
WO2006128058A3 (en) 2007-05-10
JP2008542301A (ja) 2008-11-27
EP1898926A2 (de) 2008-03-19
US20190083515A1 (en) 2019-03-21
MX2007014502A (es) 2008-02-07
WO2006128058A2 (en) 2006-11-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10925885B2 (en) Thyromimetics for the treatment of fatty liver diseases
US7829552B2 (en) Phosphorus-containing thyromimetics
CA2606498C (en) Novel phosphinic acid-containing thyromimetics
WO2011038207A1 (en) Phosphorus-containing thyroid hormone receptor agonists and methods of use
JP2008545710A (ja) 新規リン含有甲状腺ホルモン様剤
US20170319604A1 (en) Thyroid hormone receptor agonist and use thereof
US20120046364A1 (en) Novel Sulfonic Acid-Containing Thyromimetics, and Methods for Their Use
MXPA06004880A (en) Novel phosphorus-containing thyromimetics

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: METABASIS THERAPEUTICS, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:CABLE, EDWARD E.;ERION, MARK D.;REEL/FRAME:020494/0872;SIGNING DATES FROM 20071114 TO 20071128

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION